Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutHighway Maintenance Garage - Plumbing _ r AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, entered into thie day of jUeo mW 2015, by and between the Town of Southold, New York-("the Town"), a municipal corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of New York with offices at 53095 Main Road, Southold, New York, and Carter- Melence, Inc. (the"Contractor"),with an address of PO Box 907, Sound Beach,NY 11789; WITNESSETH, that the Town and the Contractor, for the consideration hereinafter named, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK TO BE DONE AND CONSIDERATION THEREFOR The Contractor shall perform the following: DESCRIPTION OF WORK The Contractor shall perform all plumbing work associated with the construction of a new Highway Maintenance Garage at the Highway/DPW Yard located at 275 Peconic Lane, Peconic, NY. All work shall be completed in accordance with the attached Bid Specifications, the Contractor's Bid Response and the Plans and Drawings entitled Town of Southold Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements, drawn by L.K. McLean Associates, P.C., a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof. ARTICLE 2. TIME OF COMPLETION The services to be rendered under this Contract shall be completed no later than two hundred and seventy (270) consecutive calendar days after the execution of this Agreement. Time of performance is of the essence of this Agreement. ARTICLE 3. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of written notice that the Contract has been fully performed and an inspection by the Town Engineer to certify that the work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Town, the Contractor shall file with the Town Comptroller an itemized voucher and the Town will pay the Contractor$238,000.00. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until it has obtained all insurance required under"this paragraph and such insurance has been approved by the Town. (a) Compensation Insurance: The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of this Contract Workers' Compensation Insurance for its employees to be assigned to the work' hereunder. 1 (b) Insurance: The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of this Contract such general liability, property damage, and commercial auto liability insurance as shall protect it from claims for damages for personal injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. The amounts of such insurance shall be as follows: General liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 for injuries, including wrongful death to any one person and subject to the same limit for each person, in an amount not less than$2,000,000 on account of any one occurrence. Property damage insurance in an amount not less than $300,000 for damage on account of all occurrences. Commercial auto liability insurance in an amount not less than $500,000 for damage on account of all occurrences. The Contractor shall furnish the above insurances to the Town and shall also name the Town as an additional named insured in said policies. (c) Any accident shall be reported to the office of the Town Clerk as soon as possible and not later than twenty-four (24) hours from the time of such accident. A detailed written report must be submitted to the Town as soon thereafter as possible and not later than three (3) days after the date of such accident. ARTICLE 5. BONDS Prior to the execution of this Agreement, the Contractor shall furnish to the Town a Performance Bond wherein the named obligee is the Town. The performance bond's purpose is to secure the faithful performance of the Agreement. The Bond amount shall be $238,000.00. The bond shall be executed by a surety company approved by the Town, authorized to do business in the State of New York and with an office or representative in Suffolk County, New York. The form shall be acceptable to the Town and shall have a term through the completion of services. As an alternative to the Performance Bond, the Contractor may furnish a certified check, bank draft, money order, or a standard form irrevocable letter of credit. Certified check, bank draft or money order must be made payable to the order of the Town. The standard form irrevocable letter of credit shall be in a form acceptable to the Town. In the event the Contractor secures a Performance Bond from any of its subcontractors, said bond shall also name the Town as a dual obligee. In the event the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under this Agreement, the Town may terminate such agreement, and the Town may procure the services from other sources and hold the Contractor responsible for any excess costs incurred and deduct from payments owing to the Contractor and/or draw upon the Performance Bond as full or partial reimbursement for such excess costs. 2 ARTICLE 6. REPRESENTATIONS OF CONTRACTOR The Contractor represents and warrants: (a) That it is financially solvent and that it is experienced in and competent to perform the type of work or to furnish mechanical maintenance dredging to be furnished by it; and (b) That it is familiar with all federal, state, municipal and department laws, ordinances and regulations which may in any way affect the work or those employed therein. ARTICLE 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS The Contractor shall comply with all permits issued, to the Town in connection with the services furnished under this Agreement. ARTICLE 8. TOWN'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT The Town shall have the right to stop work or terminate the Contract if: (a) The Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors; or (b) A receiver or liquidator is appointed for the Contractor or for any of its property and is not dismissed within 20 days after such appointment or the proceedings in connection therewith are not stayed on appeal within the said 20 days; or (c) The Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any part thereof with due diligence; or (d) The Contractor fails to make prompt payment to persons supplying labor for the work; or (e) The Contractor fails or refuses to comply with all applicable laws or ordinances; or (f) The Contractor is guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of this Contract; (g) The Town's execution and participation in this contract is found to be in violation of an existing collective bargaining agreement. (h) In any event, the Town, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy it may have, may, with our without cause, by seven (7) days' notice to the Contractor, terminate the employment of the Contractor and its right to proceed as to the work. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment beyond what owed in quantum meruit. 3 ARTICLE 9. DAMAGES It is hereby mutually covenanted and agreed that the relation of the Contractor to the work to be performed by it under this Contract shall be that of an independent contractor. As an independent contractor, it will be responsible for all damage, loss or injury to persons or property that may arise in or be incurred during the conduct and progress of said work, whether or not the Contractor, its agents, or employees have been negligent. The Contractor shall hold and keep the Town free and discharged of and from any and all responsibility and liability of any sort or kind. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for risks or casualties of every description, for loss or injury to persons or property arising out of the nature of the work, from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen or unusual difficulty. The Contractor shall make good any damages that may occur in consequence of the work or any part of it. The Contractor shall assume all blame, loss and responsibility of any nature by reason of neglect or violation of any federal, state, county or local laws, regulations or ordinances. ARTICLE 10. INDEMNITY AND SAVE HARMLESS AGREEMENT The Contractor agrees to indemnify and save the Town, its officers, agents and employees harmless from any liability imposed upon the Town, its officers, agents and/or employees arising -from the negligence, active or passive, of the Contractor and from and against any damages, claims, or expenses,including reasonable attorney's fees, arising out of Contractor's breach of the Agreement or from Contractor's acts or omissions outside the scope of the Agreement or arising out of claims or actions by third parties against Contractor by virtue of his performance of this Agreement. ARTICLE 11. NO ASSIGNMENT In accordance with the provisions of section 109 of the General Municipal Law, the Contractor is hereby prohibited from assigning, transferring, conveying, subletting or otherwise disposing of this Agreement, or of its right, title or interest in this Agreement, or its power to execute this Agreement, to any other person or corporation without the previous consent in writing of the Town. I ARTICLE 12. REQUIRED PROVISIONS OF LAW Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to have been inserted herein. If any such provision is not inserted, through mistake or otherwise, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall be physically amended forthwith to make such insertion. In particular, the Contractor shall, among other things, fully comply with: (a) Labor Law section 220-e and Executive Law sections 291-299 and the Civil Rights Law relating to prohibition against discrimination and providing equal opportunity. (b) Affirmative action as required by the Labor Law. { 4 (c) Prevention of dust hazard required by Labor Law section 222-a. (d) Preference in employment of persons required by Labor Law section 222. (e) Eight-hour workday as required by Labor Law section 220(2). ARTICLE 13. PREVAILING WAGE RATES REQUIRED BY LAW (a) The parties hereto, in accordance with the provisions of section 220(3) of the Labor Law, hereby agree that there shall be paid each employee engaged in work under this Contract not less than the wage rate and supplements set opposite the trade or occupation in which he/she is engaged, as . listed on Exhibit A attached hereto.and made a part of this Agreement, which are the wage rates and supplements established as the prevailing rate of wages for the work covered by this Contract. (b) Labor classifications not appearing on the schedule of wages can be used only with the consent of the Owner and then the rate to be paid will be given by the.Owner after being advised by the Department of Labor. (c) The Contractor shall post in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the work a. legible statement of all wage,rates and supplements, as specified in the Contract, for the various classes of mechanics, workingmen/women, or laborers employed on the work. ARTICLE 14. AUTHORITY FOR EXECUTION ON BEHALF OF THE TOWN The Supervisor has executed this Agreement pursuant to a Resolution adopted by the Town ` Board of the Town of Southold, at a meeting thereof held on November 17, 2015. Scott A. Russell, Supervisor, whose signature appears hereafter, is duly authorized and empowered to execute this instrument and enter into such an Agreement on behalf of the Town. This instrument shall be executed in duplicate. At least one copy shall be permanently filed, after execution thereof, in the office of the Town Clerk, Elizabeth Neville. ARTICLE 15. NOTICES Any and all notices and payments required hereunder shall be addressed as follows, or to such other address as may hereafter be designated in writing by either party hereto: To Town: Elizabeth A. Neville, RMC, CMC Southold Town Clerk PO Box 1179 Southold,'NY 11971-0959 5 With a copy to: Michael Collins and"James Richter Southold Town Engineer - P.O. Box 1179 Southold, NY 11971-0959 To Contractor: Donald J. O'Hanlon Carter-Melence, Inc. PO Box 907 Sound Beach, NY 11789 ARTICLE 16. WAIVER No waiver of any breach of any condition of the Agreement shall be binding unless in writing and signed by the party waiving said breach. No such waiver shall in any way affect any other term or condition of this Agreement or constitute a cause or excuse for a repetition of such or any other breach unless the waiver shall include the same. ARTICLE 17. MODIFICATION This Agreement constitutes the complete understanding of the parties. No modification of any provisions thereof shall be valid unless in writing and signed by both parties. ARTICLE 18. APPLICABLE LAW This Agreement is governed by the laws of the"State of New York. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused these presents to be duly signed the day and year first above written. TOWN OF SOUT OLD By: Scott A. Russell, Supervisor CARTER-MELENCE, INC. By: qt .�L 6 STATE OF NEW YORK) ) ss.: COUNTY OF SUFFOLK) w On this day of in the year 2015 before me personally appeared SCOTT A. RUSSELL,personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his capacity and that by his signature on the instrument, the individual or the person upon whose behalf of which the individual acted, executed the instrument. _ r'-Vl) h Notary Public LAUREN M STANDISH STATE OF NEW YORK Notary Public, State of New York No. 01 ST6164008 ) ss.: Qualified in Suffolk County COUNTY OF SUFFOLK) Commission Expires April 9,2019 On theO day of 4 in the year 2015 personally appeared d' J bho-n to ri , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me thate she executed the same i is er capacity and that b i /her signature on the instrument, the individual or the person upon w ose behalf of which the individual acted, executed the instrument. Notary Public MARY L. SILLECK Notary Public, State of New York No.01814984608 Qualified in Suffolk County Commission Expires July 29, FAO(�L 7 TOWN OF SOUTHOLD ' HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE GARAGE AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS SOUTHOLD, SUFFOLK COUNTY,NEW YORK ✓ FO ok-QN.I c* Prepared For: TOWN OF SOUTHOLD Engineering Department 53095 Main Road CARTER-MELENCE, INC. Southold,New York 11971 CONFORMED COPY PreparedBy: L.K. McLEAN ASSOCIATES,P.C. LIKARA Consulting Engineers 437 South Country Road Brookhaven,New York 11719 October 22,2015 (631)286-8668 TOWN OF SOUTHOLD 53095 MAIN ROAD, SOUTHOLD, NEW YORK 11971 1 PHONE: 631-765-1560 / FAX. 631-765-9015 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT SEALED PROPOSALS ARE SOUGHT AND REQUESTED FOR THE FOLLOWING: BID NAME: "SOUTHOLD HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE BUILDING" t .D Definite specifications may be obtained at the Southold Town Clerk's Office beginning October 22, 2015 PLACE OF OPENINGS: HATE OF OPENINGS: TIME OF OPENINGS: TOWN OF SOUTHOLD November 12,2015 2:00 PM TOWN CLERKS OFFICE 53095 MAIN ROAD SOUTHOLD,NY 11971 CONTACT PERSON: James Richter, R.A. Town of Southold, 631-765-1560 VENDORS MUST SUBMIT BIDS IN SEALED ENVELOPES. PLEASE PRINT ON THE FACE OF ENVELOPE: 1)NAME &ADDRESS OF BIDDER 2) BID NAME BID MUST BE ACCOMPANIED BY A 5 % BID SECURITY. It is the bidder's responsibility to read the attached Bid Specifications, Instructions to Bidders, and General Conditions, which outline bidding rules of the Town of Southold. Upon submission of bid, it is understood that the bidder has read, fully understands and will comply with said GENERAL CONDITIONS and specification requirements. The Town of Southold requires that this document be returned intact and that it be filled out completely. Please do not remove any pages from this bid package, and make a copy of the bid document for your records. A non-refundable fee of$25.00 will be charged for plans and specifications. Payment can be made by either money order, cash or business check(payable to the Town of Southold). A non-mandatory pre-bidder's conference will be held at 10.00" on November 2, 2015 at the Highway Yard at 275 Peconic Lane in Peconic. The Town of Southold welcomes and encourages minority and women-owned businesses to participate in the bidding process. TABLE OF CONTENTS a° TOWN OF SOUTHOLD HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE GARAGE & SITE IMPROVEMENTS 1 Title Page ------ Invitation to Bid ------ Table of Contents ------ Instructions to Bidders IB-1 thru I13-6 Standard Insurance Requirements SIR 1 thru SIR 3 General Conditions GC-I thru GC-12 Conditions of Contract CC-1 thru CC-18 r Proposal Form Package Pages I — 13 Qualification of Bidders QS-1 thru QS-4 Contract Agreement A-1 thru A-3 NYS Wage Rates ------ Technical Specifications Divisions 1 — 16 Plans INST'RUC'TIONS TO BIDDERS INDEX 1. Receipt and Opening of Bids 2. Form,Preparation and Presentation of Proposal 3. Bid Security 4. Qualifications of Bidders 5. Rejection of Bids 6. Bidders Responsibility 7. Construction Terms and Conditions 8. Security for Faithful Performance 9. Bid Reservations 10. Non-Collusive Statement 11. Addenda and Interpretations 12. Method of Award 13. Single Price Bid Analysis 14. Municipal Exempt Status 15. Labor Law 16. Wage Rates 17. Insurance Required by the Town of Southold 18. Quantities IB - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I. RECEIPT ANb OPENING OF BIDS The Town of Southold invites bids on the forms herein provided for the Highway Maintenance Garage & Site Improvements at the Highway Department yard in Peconic, New York. Sealed bids shall be received by the office of the Southold Town Clerk, 53095 Route 25 Southold,New York 11971, no later than 2:00 P.M. prevailing time on Thursday,November 12', 2015 at which time they will be opened and publicly read aloud. All bids received after the time stated for the opening in the Notice to Bidders may not be considered and will be returned unopened to the bidder. The bidder assumes the risk of any delay in the mail or in the handling of the mail by employees of the Town. Whether sent by mail or by means of personal delivery, the bidder assumes responsibility for having his bid deposited on time at the place specified. Faxed bids will not be accepted. 2. FORM,PREPARATION AND PRESENTATION OF PROPOSAL The Proposal Form as issued by the Town shall be completely filled in, in black ink or typed on the original bid form. No photocopies will be accepted. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in both words and figures, with a total or gross sum for which the bid is made. All lines must have an indication of the bidder's response whether it be "0", "N/A", "No Charge", or a dollar figure. All lines must be filled in to indicate bidder's acknowledgement of the request. Bids that do not have all applicable lines filled in on the bid proposal form may be disqualified as a non-responsive bid. We cannot assume there is "no charge" when lines are left empty. Bids that contain any omission, erasure, alteration, addition or items not called for in the itemized bid form or that contain irregularities of any kind will not be accepted. 'In case of discrepancy between the unit price and total amount bid for any item, the unit price, as expressed in words, shall govern. The following two items will automatically render a bid unacceptable to the Town of Southold: a. Failure to sign bid proposal page. b. Failure to include necessary bid security deposit(as required). It shall be fully understood that any deviations from the inclusion of the above items will be grounds to see the bid as nori-compliant and will not be considered for award. 3. BID SECURITY (a) The Bid must be accompanied by a certified check on a solvent bank or trust company with its principal place of business in New York State, or an acceptable bid bond, in an amount equal to not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount bid, made payable to the Town of Southold (herein identified as Owner), as assurance that the bid is made in good faith. The certified checks or bid bonds of unsuccessful bidders will be returned after execution of the Contract between the Owner and the successful bidder; the certified check or bid bond of the successful bidder will be retained until filing and approval of the Performance Bond and until the completion of ten percent(10%)of the work under the Contract. IB -2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (b) The successful bidder, upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the Contract and bonds required within ten (10) days after the date of notice of the acceptance of his bid, shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security,he deposited with his bid. 4. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS (a) Forms for qualifications of bidders, giving evidence of sufficient facilities, equipment, experience and financial ability to insure completion of the work are provided with the bid specification package, and shall be filled out by the contractor and returned with the bid submission. (b) Information contained in any statement of financial ability shall be not more than third days old at the time of submission. (c) The Town reserves the right to make such investigation as it may deem necessary or advisable to determine any bidder's ability to do the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Town, on request, all data and information pertinent thereto. The Town reserves the right to reject any bid if such investigation fails to satisfy the Town that the bidder is fully qualified to do the work. Financial instability of a bidder may be cause for non-award. 5. REJECTION OF.BIDS (a) The TOWN BOARD reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted in the qualifications statement or an investigation of such bidder fails to satisfy the TOWN BOARD that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional bids will be considered informal and will be rejected. (b)The TOWN BOARD reserves the right to reject any and all bids, in whole or in part,to waive any informality in any or all bids, and to accept the bid or part thereof which it deems most favorable to the Town after all bids have been examined and/or checked. 6. BIDDERS RESPONSIBILITY (a) Bidders are cautioned not to submit bids until after having inspected the site of the proposed improvement and having made themselves familiar with local conditions. The attention of persons intending to submit bids is specifically called to the paragraph of the Contract which debars a Contractor from pleading misunderstanding or deception because of estimates or quantities, character, location or other conditions surrounding the same. Special attention is called to the notes on the Plans or in the itemized form of bid, which are made a part of this Contract,which may alter or revise the Specifications for the particular contract. (b) No representation is made as to the existence or nonexistence of groundwater, which may in any way impede the work, proposed to be accomplished. Each bidder shall fully inform himself as to groundwater and sub-surface conditions prior to submitting his bid. (c) The submission of a bid will be construed to mean that the bidder is fully informed as to the IB - 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BITERS extent, cost, and character of the materials, labor, and equipment required to complete the proposed job in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, including all other expenses incidental thereto. (d)Bidders must examine the Plans and Specifications and exercise their own judgment as to the nature and amount of the whole of the work to be done, and for the bid prices, must assume all risks of variance by whomsoever made in computation or statement of amounts or quantities necessary to fully complete the work in strict compliance with the Contract Documents. (e) The Bidder shall assume all risks and responsibility and shall complete the work in whatever material and under whatever conditions he may encounter or create, without extra cost to the Town. (fl No pleas of ignorance or misunderstanding of conditions that exist or that may hereafter exist, or of conditions or difficulties that may be encountered in the execution of the work under this Contract, as a result of failure to make the necessary examinations and investigations, will be to fulfill in every detail all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, or will be accepted as a basis for any claims whatsoever for extra compensation, or for an extension of time. 7. CONSTRUCTION TERMS AND CONDITIONS The successful bidder is warned that the work specified in the Conditions of Contract, together with the Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, General Conditions, Plans, Specifications and instructions of the Engineer or his duly authorized representative will be rigidly enforced. 8. SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL,PERFORMANCE AND MAINTENANCE The successful bidder shall be required to execute a Performance Bond equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount bid such bonds to be executed by a New York licensed insurance carrier/surety company with an A rating or better from A.M. Best & Co. and acceptable to the Owner; or bonds secured by collateral; or securities approved by the Owner. The Performance Bond shall be written so as to remain in full force and effect as a maintenance bond for a period of not less than one(1)year after the date of final acceptance of the work. The successful bidder,upon failure to execute and deliver the bonds required within ten(10) days after the date of notice of award, shall forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid, and he will be liable for and he agrees to pay to the Owner on demand, the difference between the price bid and the price for which such contract shall subsequently be re-let including the cost of such re-letting less the amount of such deposit. No plea of mistake in such accepted bid shall be available to the bidder for recovery of his deposit or as a defense to any action upon accepted bid unless said mistake can be proven by documentary evidence acceptable to the Town. After approval of the bonds and execution of the Contract and after ten (10)percent of the work has been completed, the bid security accompanying the bid will be returned. IB -4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 9. BID RESERVATIONS Bids submitted shall remain in effect for forty-five (45) days past the date of bid opening. This period may be extended, for the benefit of the Town, by mutual agreement between the Bidder and the Purchasing Agent. 10.NON-COLLUSIVE STATEMENT The form of non-collusion bidding certification contained in the proposal package must be executed by the Bidder and submitted with the proposal. The submission of this statement certifies that the prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor. 11. ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS Every request for information or interpretation of the Contract Documents or Drawings must be addressed in writing to the Town Engineering Department of Southold 53095 Main Road Southold, New York 11971 (fax) 631-765-1366, and to be given any consideration, must be received at least five (5) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any such interpretations or supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda, and will be mailed or faxed to all prospective bidders. The failure of any bidder to receive any such addenda will not relieve the bidder of any obligation under his bid as submitted. Any addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. 12. METHOD OF AWARD The bid will be awarded to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder, as will best promote the public interest, taking into consideration the reliability of the bidder, the quality of the materials, equipment, or supplies to be furnished, and conformity with the specifications. 13. SINGLE PRICE BID ANALYSIS In the event a single bid is received, the Town will conduct a price analysis of the bid price prior to the award of the contract. 14.MUNICIPAL EXEMPT STATUS The Town is exempt from the payment of Federal, State and local taxes. Taxes must not be included in proposal prices. 15. LABOR LAW The Contractor and each and every subcontractor performing work at the site of the project to which this Contract relates shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Labor Law, as amended, of the State of New York. IB - 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Attention is called to certain provisions of the Labor Law, as set forth in the Conditions of Contract,Paragraph 11, which are hereby referred to and made a part hereof. 16. WAGE RATES The rates of wages determined by the New York State Industrial Commissioner pursuant to the Labor Law, which shall be paid on this project, are set forth herein following the Instructions to Bidders. Contractors and subcontractors are required to submit to the Town, within thirty days after issuance of the first payroll, and every thirty days thereafter, a transcript of the original payroll records, subscribed and affirmed as true under the penalties of perjury. 17. INSURANCE REQUIRED BY THE TOWN OF SOUTHOLD The successful bidder will be required to procure and pay for the following types of insurance, as set forth in more detail herein following the Instructions to Bidders in the Standard Insurance requirements Section. (a) Comprehensive Automobile Policy (b) Comprehensive General Liability (c) Excess/Umbrella Insurance (d) Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability (e) Workmen's Compensation Insurance (f) Disability Insurance and Unemployment Insurance 18. QUANTITIES Any quantities set forth in the bid specifications are approximations only. No guarantee is made for any quantities stated. Payment shall be on the basis of actual quantities supplied or the actual work done at the unit prices quoted. 1 IB - 6 STANDARD INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS TOWN OF SOUTHOLD CONTRACT INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS INSURANCE IDENTIFICATION: THE BID NUMBER IS TO APPEAR ON ALL INSURANCE CERTIFICATES INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR: The Corporation/Contractor/Agency/Consultant, is an independent contractor and covenants and agrees that it, its agents, servants and/or employees will neither hold itself/themselves out as, nor claim to be an employee, servant or agent of the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD, and that it, its agents and employees will not make claim, demand or application to or for any right or privilege applicable to an officer or employee of the TOWN OF SOUTHOLD including, but not limited to Worker's Compensation coverage, Unemployment Insurance benefits, Social Security coverage or retirement membership or credit. INSURANCE: Contractor/vendor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance required under the following paragraphs, and the Town of Southold has approved such insurance. WORKERS' COMPENSATION: Contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of this contract, such insurance as will protect both the owner and the contractor from claims under worker's compensation acts and amendments thereto and from any other claims for property damage and for personal injury including death, which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations by contractor or by any other party directly or indirectly employed by the•contractor. Copy of Certificate to be provided to the Town of Southold. DISABILITY INSURANCE & UNEMPLOYMENT INSURANCE: Contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the entire term of the contract any disability benefits and unemployment insurance as required by law. Copy of Certificate to be provided to the Town of Southold. GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of the contract, such bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance as shall protect him and the Town from claims for damages for bodily injury including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damage which may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor/vendor to maintain such insurance in amounts sufficient to fully protect himself and the Town, but in no instance shall amounts be less than those set forth below. These amounts are specified only to establish the minimum coverage acceptable. Bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 (one million dollars) for damages on account of any one accident, and in an amount of not less than$1,000,000 (one million dollars) on account of all accidents (general aggregate). EXCESS/UMBRELLA INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall take out and maintain during the life of the project an excess/umbrella insurance policy in an amount of not less than $2,000,000 (Two million dollars) each occurrence and aggregate. SIR- 1 STANDAR® INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OTHER CONDITIONS OF COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: 1. Coverage shall be written on commercial general liability form. 2. Coverage shall include: A. Contractual liability B. Independent contractors C. Products and completed operations AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: Automobile bodily injury liability and property damage liability insurance shall be provided by the contractor/vendor with a minimum combined single limit(CSL) of$1,000,000 (one million dollars). OTHER CONDITIONS OF AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE: 1. Coverage shall include: A. All owned vehicles B. Hired car and non-ownership liability coverage C. Statutory no-fault coverage OWNERS & CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY: An OCP Policy shall be required by the Town of Southold in limits of $1,000,000 combined single limit, each occurrence, $1,000,000 General Aggregate. This insurance must fully cover the legal liability of the specific farm owner, as Owner, NAMING THE FARM OWNER AND TOWN OF SOUTHOLD AS INSURED. The contractor shall furnish the Town with the original insurance policy. ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS OF INSURANCE: 1. Contractor/vendor shall submit copies of any or all required insurance policies as and when requested by the Town. 2. If any of the contractor's/vendor's policies of insurance are cancelled or not renewed during the life of the contract, immediate notice of cancellation of non-renewal shall be delivered to the Town no less than 10 days prior to the date and time of cancellation or non-renewal. CERTIFICATE OF-INSURANCE: The contractor/vendor shall file with the Town of Southold.prior to commencing work under this contract, a certificate of insurance. 1. Certificate of insurance shall include: A. Name and address of insured B. Issue date of certificate C. Insurance company name D. Type of coverage in effect E. Policy number F. Inception and expiration dates of policies included G. Limits of liability for all policies on certificate. included on certificate SIR- 2 STANDAR® INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Description of operations/locations/etc. Box must include the statement: "THE TOWN OF SOUTHOLD IS LISTED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED" CERTIFICATE HOLDER SHALL BE LISTED AS: TOWNOF SOUT'HOLD 53095 MATT ROAD SOUT HOLD.NV 11971 2. If the contractor's/vendor's insurance policies should be non-renewed, cancelled or expire during the life of the contact, the Town shall be provided with a new certificate indicating the replacement policy information as requested above. Thirty days (30) prior written notice to the Town of Southold for cancellation is applicable. SIR- 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS INDEX 1. Definitions of Terms 2. Standards of Workmanship 3. Samples 4. Manufactured Materials 5. Laboratory, 6. Shop Drawings 7. Permits 8. Plans and Specifications 9. Cutting, Patching and Digging 10. Errors, Omissions and Discrepancies 11. Temporary Office&Toilet 12. Proper Method of Work and Proper Materials 13. Inspection 14. Waiver 15. Water and Electric Power 16. Machinery and Equipment 17. Maintenance 18. Schedule of Operations 19. Right to Use Work 20. Notice of Warning 21. Warning Signs 22. Accident Prevention 23. Damages 24. Maintenance of Traffic 25. Final Site Cleaning 26. Protection of Land Markers,Trees, Shrubs, and Properly 27. Protection of Utilities 28. No Damages for Delay 29. Record Keeping 30. Subcontractors and Suppliers 31. Penal Law GC - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS: Whenever the following words and expressions are used in the Specifications,it is understood that they have the meaning defined below: PIANS: All official drawings or reproductions of drawings pertaining to the work or to any structure connected therewith. SPECIFICATIONS: The body of directions, requirements, descriptions, etc. contained in this document, together with all documents of any description and agreements made (or to be made) pertaining to the methods or manner of performing the work and/or to the quantities and quality of materials to be furnished and accepted under this Contract. OWNER: Shall mean Town Board,Town of Southold. ENGINEER (ARCHITECT): the Owner and/or duly authorized representative to represent the Owner in the execution of the work covered by the consultants and assistants engaged by the Owner and the Engineer to the extent of the particular duties entrusted to them. CONTRACT: Collectively, the Contract executed by the Owner and the Contractor, Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Construction Drawings, Addenda, Performance Bonds, and all supplemental agreements made or to be made. CONTRACTOR: The party of the second part hereto, whether corporation, firm or individual, or any combination thereof, and successor, personal representatives, executors, administrators and assigns, and any person, firm or corporation who or which shall at any time be substituted in place of the second part under this Contract. INSPECTOR: An authorized representative of the Owner or his Engineer assigned to make any and all necessary inspections of the work performed and the materials fiu-nished by the Contract. MATERIALS: Any approved materials acceptable to the Engineer and conforming to the requirements of these Specifications. WORK: All of the work proposed to be accomplished at the site of the project, and all such other work as is in any manner required to accomplish the complete project. This includes all plant,labor, materials, supplies, equipment and other facilities and acts necessary or proper or incidental to the carrying out and completion of the terms of this Contract. The term "work performed" shall be construed to include the material delivered to and suitably stored at the site of the project. 2. STANDARDS OF WORKMANSHIP: The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail or an apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice observed in the latest current construction work is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of first quality is to be used in this connection and all interpretations of these Specifications shall be made upon this basis. GC-2 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3. SAMPLES: The Contractor shall furnish for approval, all samples as directed. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Samples shall be submitted in ample time so as to prevent delay in fabrication or ordering of materials, allowing for a reasonable time for the Engineer to consider the samples submitted and, if necessary,to permit a resubmission of samples to the Engineer until approval is given. Work and material shall be furnished and executed in accordance with approved samples, in every aspect. Each sample shall be labeled, bearing material, name and quality, Contractor's name, date and other pertinent data. Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be in duplicate and of adequate size to show quality, type, color, range and finish and texture of material. Materials shall not be ordered until approval is received in writing from Engineer. 4. MANUFACTURED MATERIALS: Where several materials are specified by name, the Engineer shall have the right,before execution`of the Contract,to require any and all bidders to state the materials upon which they based their bid. Where any materials are specified by name or trade name, or by catalog number of a company or companies, the Contractor shall furnish the article mentioned unless approval of the Engineer is obtained in writing for a substitution. Should Contractor desire to substitute another material for one or more specified by name,he shall apply in writing for such permission and state credit or extra involved. He shall also provide supporting data and samples for Engineer's consideration. Unless particularly specified otherwise, all manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, assembled, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer and including the necessary preparation to properly install the work. Where reference is made to manufacturer's directions, the Contractor shall submit such directions to the Engineer as required. The materials used in construction shall be disposed as not to endanger the work, and so that full access may at all times be had to partly completed work and structures and they shall be so disposed as to cause no injury to those having access to the work or any of the units. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. Standards of work required throughout shall be of such grades as will bring first- class results only. The type of labor employed by the Contractor shall be such as will insure the uninterrupted continuity of the entire work,without conflict of any kind. 5. LABORATORY: Laboratories shall be designated by the Engineer for testing the materials to be used under the Contract. Where tests are made by other than the designated laboratories, two certified copies showing correctly the chemical analysis and physical tests shall be furnished to the Engineer. 6. SHOP DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer six (6) copies of all shop drawings and schedules and no work shall be fabricated until his approval has been given. All shop drawings submitted to the Engineer must be in English, and must bear the Contractor's stamp of approval evidencing that the drawings have been checked. GC- 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS The Contractor will make any corrections in the drawings required by the Engineer and will file with the Engineer four corrected copies. Approval by the Engineer of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for (a) errors of any sort in shop or setting drawings or schedules; or (b) deviations from Plans and Specifications unless the Contractor, at the time of submission of said drawings and schedules, has given notice to the Engineer of any such deviations. 7. PERMITS: 7.1 Municipal: All work in connection with the installation of pipes or other underground structures of a like nature either within or without the limits of the highway, shall follow all the provisions as contained herein together with the provisions, as they apply, of the Highway Law (Town Code) with all subsequent changes, additions or corrections thereto. A. The Contractor shall obtain from the Building Department a certificate of occupancy, whenever the scope of work of the Contract provides for the construction of a building or structure, or for modification or alteration of a building or structure, so that a certificate of occupancy, or a revised certificate of occupancy is required under state and/or local law. The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the building permit and permit(s)pre-requisite thereto, including but not limited to the following, unless Contractor is specifically required to obtain the same pursuant to other provisions of this document: (1) Building permit (2) Fire prevention permit (3) Health Department/Application to construct a) Sanitary system including SPDES permit b) Hazardous materials storage The following additional permits when required under law shall also be obtained by the Owner: (1) NYSDEC permit(s) (2) Town Division of Environmental Protection (3) Suffolk County Farmland Committee (4) U.S. Army Corp of Engineers The Contractor shall give all notices, and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and conditions of the permits, bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified, and shall be responsible for acquisition of all pertinent information necessary for such compliance. The Contractor shall be responsible for: (1) Coordinating all building department and other department and agency inspections and approvals, (2) Obtaining U.L. approvals, (3) Health Department inspections and approvals, (4) Obtaining final certificate of occupancy. On projects involving multiple contracts, it shall be the responsibility of the"General Contractor"to GC- 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS coordinate with the building department and other agencies and to obtain the certificate of occupancy. It shall be the responsibility of the mechanical contractors (prime contractors other than the G.C.) to coordinate inspections and approvals of that part of the project, which falls within the scope of'their contract with the G.C., and/or as may be appropriate, directly with the approving agency. In the event that one or more of the contractors on a multi-contract project fails to perform the work in a timely manner, thereby causing undue delay in the completion of the project, and the issuance of the certificate of occupancy, the owner shall in that event, have the option to exercise "The owners right to stop work or terminate contract" as provided for in the conditions of the contract. B. Pipes and Underground Structures: All work in connection with the installation of pipes or other underground structures of a like nature either within or without the limits of the highway, shall follow all the provisions, as they apply, of the Highway Law As per Town Code Standards) with all subsequent changes, additions or corrections thereto. C. Any work to be performed within the Town Highway right-of-way will require a Town Highway Department road-opening permit. Obtaining' of the permit and subsequent release/approval shall be the,responsibility of the Contractor. Acceptance of the contractor's performance bond in lieu of the Contractors road-opening bond shall be at the option of the Highway Department. 7.2 Suffolk County: All permits required for opening County roads and making connections with County drains will be obtained by the Owner. A copy of the permit, which must be kept on the job at all times, will be supplied to the Contractor. The Contractor will not be permitted to open any County,road or make any connection to any County drain until he has been supplied with this permit. (a) Department of Public Works All permits required for opening County roads and making connections with County drains, will be obtained by the Owner. A Copy of the permit, which must be kept on the job at all times, will be supplied to the Contractor. The Contractor will not be permitted to open any County road or make any connection to any County drain until he has been supplied with this permit. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance to all conditions of the permit and for the subsequent release/approval. (b) Department of Health Services: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals pursuant to Health Department permits described in paragraph 7.IA. GC- 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS 7.3 State of New York: The Contractor shall obtain all'necessary New York State highway permits whenever the Contract requires any work to be done within or upon existing State highway right-of- ways. These permits shall be obtained from the District Office in Hauppauge prior to the performance of the work. Upon application for the permit, the Contractor will be required to supply the following: (1) Three (3) copies of a sketch or print showing description and location of the proposed work. The Engineer will supply these prints to the Contractor. (2) Contingent liability insurance for the State (in addition to his own liability insurance) shall be furnished in amounts and mariner as required by the State of New York.'The contingent protective liability and completed operations liability insurance policy to cover: "The people of the State of New York and/or the Superintendent of Public Works covering liability arising with respect to all operations through highway permits by permittee or by anyone acting,by, through or for the permittee, including omissions and supervisory acts of the State", in the amount of personal injury(including death) and property damage as required. 8. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: The Contractor will be furnished with five sets of Plans and Specifications giving all the details and dimensions necessary for carrying out the work. One copy of Plans and Specifications furnished to the Contractor must be kept constantly on the site. Anything shown on the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in the Specifications, and not shown on the Plans and all the work and materials necessary for the completion of the work according to the intent and meaning of the Contract shall be furnished, performed and done as if the same were both mentioned in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings. Any conflict or inconsistency between the Plans and Specifications, or any discrepancy between the figures and scale of Drawings, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer, whose decision thereon shall be conclusive. In the event the meaning of any portion of the Specifications or Drawings or any supplementary drawings or instructions of the Engineer is doubtful, the same shall be understood to call for the best type of construction,both as to materials and workmanship,which reasonably can be;interpreted. All-materials and workmanship must be strictly in accordance with the Specifications. The Plans show approximate size, arrangement'and location of the proposed work. The Engineer will give base lines, grades, shapes and dimensions and the Contractor shall construct the work exactly in accordance with such instructions of the Engineer subject, however, to change as provided for under the headings "Changes and Alterations" and "Compensation to be Paid to the Contractor". Additional copies of Plans and Specifications,when requested, will be furnished to the Contractor at cost of reproduction. The Contractor shall furnish to each of the subcontractors and materialmen such copies of the Contract Documents as may be required for their work. GC- 6 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 9• CUTTING o PATCHING AND DIGGING: The- Contractor shall,do all cutting, ,fitting or ,patching of his work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by work of other contractors shown upon or reasonably implied by , Drawings and Specifications for the completed structure, and he shall make good after them as Engineer may direct. Any cost caused by defective or.ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, digging or othei wise, and shall not cut or alter the work of any,other contractor save with the consent of the Engineer. 10. FURORS, OMISSIONS AND DISCREPANCIES: a) If any errors, omissions or,discrepancies,appear in the drawings, 'S ecifications -or 'other documents, the Contractor shall, within ten days from receiving such Drawings, Specifications or documents,,notify the Engineer in writing of such errors or omissions. In the event of the Contractor's failing to give such notice,he will.be held responsible for the results of any such errors or omissions and the cost of rectifying the same. b) If, in the opinion of the Contractor, anywork is shown on Drawings, or details,,or is specified in such a manner as will make it impossible to produce a first,class piece of, work, or should discrepancies appear between the Drawings and/or Specifications, he shall refer the same to the, Engineer,for interpretation before proceeding with the work. If the Contractor fails to make such references to the Engineer-, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out the work in satisfactory manner as directed. , c) Should a conflict occur in or between the Drawings and Specifications and/or existing conditions, the Contractor shall be deemed to have estimated on the,more expensive way of doing the work, ' unless he shall have asked for and obtained a decision in writing from the Engineer, before the submission of bids, as to which method ormaterial will produce the results to the best interest of the Town. 11. TEMPORARY OFFICE & TOILET: The Contractor shall provide anoffice trailer,for use by the town and its representatives..The trailer shall.be climate controlled and,have a clean plan table, desk and chair provided inside. The Contractor,shall provide and maintain a' sanitary temporary toilet where directed,by the Engineer. The temporary toilet shall be enclosed and weatherproof and kept in a sanitary condition at all times. Upon removal of the temporary outside toilet,the vault shall be disinfected, filled and all evidence of the toilet removed from the site. 12.' PROPER METHOD OF WORK AND PROPER MATERIALS: The Engineer shall have the power in general to direct the order and sequence of the work,,which shall be such as to permit the entire work under this Contract to be begun and to proceed as rapidly as possible and such as to bring the several parts of the work to,a successful completion at about the same time. , Tat any time before the commencement or during the progress of the work-the materials and appliances used or to be used appear to the Engineer as insufficient or improper, for.assuring the GC- 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS quality of the work required, or the required rate of progress, he may order the Contractor to increase their efficiency or to improve their character, and the failure of the Engineer to demand any increase of such efficiency or improvement shall not release the Contractor from his obligation to secure the quality of work or the rate of progress specified. During freezing or inclement weather, no work shall be done except such as can be done satisfactorily and in a manner to secure first-class construction throughout. All work shall be done in such a manner as will properly protect and support existing permanent structures,pipe lines, etc. 13. INSPECTION: Inspectors shall be authorized to inspect all work done on materials furnished. Such inspections may extend to all parts of the work and to the preparation or manufacture of the materials to be used. In case of any dispute arising between the Contractor and the Inspector as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject material or suspend the work until the question at issue shall be referred to and decided by the Engineer. The Inspector shall not be authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax or release any requirements of these Specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work, nor to issue instruction contrary to the Plans and Specifications. The Inspector shall in no case act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. Any advice, which the Inspector may give the Contractor, shall in no way be construed as binding the Engineer nor the Owner in any way nor releasing the Contractor from the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. The Contractor shall be conclusively presumed to be acquainted with all existing conditions and to guarantee that all work and materials shall,upon final completion of the work,be turned over to the Owner in a complete and perfect condition and he shall be responsible for the proper care, maintenance and protection of all work and material until his entire Contract is completed and all work and materials found in good condition and accepted. The Contractor will be held responsible for the entire work until completed and accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The Contractor shall, at all times, provide the Owners, Engineer, assistants and inspectors under him with necessary facilities for determining both on the work and at the places of manufacture, that all work being performed and all materials being manufactured are strictly in accord with the Contract. Until acceptance of work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the work including action of the elements or any other cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall continuously and adequately protect the work against damage from any cause. 14. WAIVED: Neither the inspection by the Owner or Engineer or any part of their employees nor any order, measurement or certificate by the Engineer nor any order by the Owner for the payment of any money nor any payment for or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the work by the Engineer or the Owner nor any extension of time nor any possession taken by the Owner or its employees shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this Contract or of any power herein reserved to the Owner or any right to damages herein provided; nor shall any waiver of any breach of the Contract constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach. Any remedy provided in this Contract shall be construed as cumulative;that is in addition to each and every remedy herein provided. GC- 8 GENERAL. CONDITIONS 15. WATER AND ELECTRIC POWER: All water and electric power supply for construction purposes must be provided by the Contractor. ,The cost.shall be borne by the Contractor. 16. MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT: All machinery, equipment, trucks and vehicles used in the prosecution of the work or in connection therewith, shall at all times be in proper working condition. The Contractor shall be responsible for curtailing noise, smoke, fumes or any other nuisance resulting from his operations. He shall, upon written,notification from the Engineer, make any repairs, replacements, adjustments, additions, and furnish mufflers when necessary to fulfill these requirements. 11. MAINTENANCE: If, within one year from the date of issuance of the Final. Certificate, any portion of the work shall,in the opinion of the Owner,require repairing,replacing, or rebuilding,the Contractor shall start, such repairs within five (5) days after the receipt of'notice from the Owner, and if the Contractor shall fail or,neglect to, start such repairs within the said five (5) days, the Owner may employ such other person or persons as they deem proper to make such repairs and pay the expense thereof out of any sum retained by them, provided nothing herein contained shall limit the liability of the Contractor or his Surety to the Owner for nonperformance of the Contractor's obligations at any time. 18. SCHEDULE OF OPERATIONS: Within 5 days ,after the signing of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit a proposed program of operations, ,showing clearly how he ,proposes to conduct the work so as to bring about the completion of his work within the time limit specified. This program shall outline the proposed sequence of operations, the rates'of progress and the dates when his work will be sufficiently advanced to permit the installation of work under this Contract. 19. RIGHT TO USE WORK: The Owner may enter upon and use the whole or any portion of the'work, which may be in condition to use any time previous to-its final acceptance by the Owner. Such use shall not constitute or be evidence of acceptance by the Owner or the Engineer of the whole or any part of the material furnished or work performed under the Contract. 20. NOTICE OF WARNING: If the Contractor shall fail to make prompt payment to persons supplying labor or,materials for the work, or refuse or fail to supply enough�properly skilled workmen, or proper materials or refuse or fail to prosecute the work or any part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the period herein specified,(or any duly authorized extension thereof) or fail to complete the work within said period or fail or refuse,to regard laws, ordinances, codes, instructions of the Engineer, then the Engineer shall forward by registered mail to the Contractor, at,the address given in the Contract, a Notice of Warning, and in the event the Contractor failsio comply,with said Notice of Warning within five(5) days from receipt thereof,the Owner shall have the right to terminate the Contract. 21. WARNING SIGNS: , Cpntractor shall provide and maintain proper luminous warning and detour signs where directed by the Engineer. Obstructions such as stored materials, equipment and excavations shall he marked with not less than two lights, which shall be not more than 4 feet,apart. GC-9 GENERAL CONDITIONS All lights shall be kept burning from one-half hour before sunset to until one-half hour after sunrise. 22. ACCIDENT PREVENTION: During the performance of the work, the Contractor shall exercise all reasonable precautions for the protection of persons and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment and all other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction published by the Associated General Contractors of America to the extent that such provisions are not inconsistent with Federal, State or Municipal laws or regulations. If any operation, practice or condition is deemed by the Engineer to be unsafe, he shall notify the Contractor in writing to take corrective action. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any operation, practice or condition shall be promptly discontinued and before the affected part of the work is resumed,remedial action taken. The Owner reserves the right to remedy any neglect on the part of Contractor as regards the protection of the work which may come to its attention, after 24 hours'notice in writing; except that in cases of emergency it shall have the right to remedy any neglect without notice, and in either case to deduct the cost of such remedy from money due the Contractor. Nothing in the foregoing paragraphs shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from full responsibility at all times for safe prosecution of the work. 23. DAMAGES: The Contractor shall pay and make good all losses or damages arising out of any cause connected with the Contract and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all claims and any and all liability or responsibility of every nature and kind for any loss, damage or injury which may be brought against the Owner or any of its officers or agents, by reason of, or connected with the .work or materials furnished under the Contract and shall pay all costs and expenses of every kind, character, and nature whatever, occurring upon or arising out of the Contract. 24. MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC: All work under this Contract is to be completed within the time indicated in the Contract Agreement or as extended by the Owner. If in the meantime it should become necessary, because of the lateness of the season, or any other reason to stop the work, the Contractor shall at his own expense, open proper drainage ditches,erect temporary structures where necessary,prepare the roads so there will be minimum interference with traffic, set up and maintain a competent organization as directed by the Engineer, to keep the highways in first class condition for,traffic, and take every precaution to prevent any damage or unreasonable deterioration of the work during the time it is closed. 25. FINAL SITE CLEARING: Before final payment will be approved, the Contractor shall prepare the construction areas as follows: All basins, manholes and pipe as constructed shall be cleaned free from accumulated construction dirt, silt, form work, etc., and all proper restoration as called for in the items of the Specifications shall be complete in every detail. The Contractor shall clean all construction areas free from accumulated forms, excavation fill, construction materials and construction shanties. All areas shall be completed in every detail and shall be broom cleaned from excess dirt and materials. GC - 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS 26. PROTECTION OF LAND MARKERS TREES SHRUBS AND PROPERTY: Wherever in the conduct of the work; a monument marking,a point of public,or private survey is encountered or brought to view by excavation, the fact�shall at once be communicated�to the Engineer. In no case shall the Contractor remove the same until the location for resetting shall have been made by the Engineer. All monuments or land.markings exposed to view when the work is first undertaken shall be,carefully preserved and the greatest care exercised to prevent injury to or disturbance of position of the same. The unit price of all items shall include the cost of restoring to,its former condition any sidewalks.or curbs, as well as restoring any trees, shrubs or lawns that may be damaged during this construction. No additional payment will be made. The Contractor is required at his own expense to obtain, any and all permits for use of private ,property if he uses such property,for storage, transportation or accomplishment of the work under the Contract. Private property shall be cleaned up neatly, any damage repaired and premises restored to their original condition. 27. PROTECTION OF UTILITIES: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the existence of structures of municipal and other public service corporations on or adjoining the site of the work, and give reasonable opportunity to and cooperation with the owners'.of these utilities in the work of reconstructing or altering them. Such reconstruction and alteration shall be so conducted as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the Contractor. Any additional cost of various items of work because of these utilities shall be included in the price,bid for these items. The Engineer shall direct ,the public.utility corporations to shift or remove those�utility structures •that may be necessary to permif the Contractor to carry out the work in accordance with the Plans. The Contractor shall not,remove or cause to be removed, any structure;or part of a structure owned by a public utility corporation without the approval of the Engineer.,, The Contractor shall cooperate with the,public'utility corporation whose structures (aerial, surface or subsurface) are within the limits'of or along the outside of the right-of-way, to make it possible for them to maintain uninterrupted service., 'The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the utility corporation. 28. NO DAMAGES FOR DELAY: Notwithstanding any other provisions to this Contract, the Contractor agrees to make no claim for damages for delay in the performance of this Contract occasioned by any act of the Town or any of its representatives, and agrees that any such claim shall be fully compensated for by an extension of time to complete performance of the work as provided herein. This provision shall not apply to any act or omission to act of the Town or any of its representatives, wherein the same is done in bad faith and with deliberate intent to delay the Contractor in the performance of this Contract. GC- 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS 29. RECORD KEEPING: The Contractor shall establish and maintain complete and accurate books, records, documents, accounts and other evidence directly pertinent to performance under this contract (hereinafter the "records"). The records'must be kept for the balance of the contract term and for six (6) years thereafter, 30. SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS:' Within five days after receipt from the Engineer of notice to begin work, the Contractor will furnish written notice of names of all subcontractors to be employed on the project and the general items of work to be done by'them. Simultaneously,,the Contractor shall furnish written notice of the names of suppliers of materials to be used on the project. The Owner may disapprove for good cause any subcontractor or material supplier selected by the Contractor by giving written notice of its disapproval within five (5) days after receiving the names of subcontractors and material suppliers, to the Contractor who shall thereupon promptly notify the Owner of the names of the subcontractor or material supplier,selected in replacement which shall again be subject to approval by the Owner. 31. PENAL LAW: Attention is called to Section 1918 of the,Penal Law as follows: Construction or blastingpipes cone idngLcombustible gas No person shall discharge explosives in the ground,nor shall any person other than a state or county employee regularly engaged in the maintenance and"repair thereof excavate in any then existing street, highway, or public place, unless notice thereof in writing shall have been given at least seventy-two hours in advance to the person, corporation or municipality engaged in the distribution of gas in such territory. The person having direction or control of such work 'shall give such notice, and further he shall ascertain whether there is within one hundred feet in such street,, highway or public place, or in the case of a proposed discharge of explosives within a radius of two hundred 'feet of such discharge, any pipe of any other person, corporation or municipality conveying combustible gas, and if thereby any such pipe,'he shall also give such notice to any other such person, corporation or municipality. Provided,however, that in any emergency involving danger to life, health, or property it shall be lawful to excavate without using explosives if the notices prescribed herein are given as soon as reasonably possible, and to discharge explosives to protect a person or persons from an immediate and substantial danger of death or serious personal injury if such notices are given before any such discharge is undertaken. Any such work shall be performed in such manner as,to avoid danger to any pipe conveying combustible gas. Any violation of the provisions of this section shall be a misdemeanor. 1 GC - 12 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT INDEX 1. Contract Documents and Definitions 2. Scope of the Work 3. Compensation to be paid to the Contractor 4. Time of Essence 5. Commencement of Work 6. Time of Completion 7. Liquidated Damages for Delays 8. Extension of Time. No Waiver 9. Weather 10. Contract Security 11. Laws and Ordinances 12. Qualifications for Employment 13. Non-Discrimination 14. Payment of Employees 15. Estimates and Payments 16. Acceptance of Final Payment Constitutes Release 17. Construction Reports 18. Inspection and Tests 19. Plans and Specifications: Interpretations 20. Subsurface Conditions Found Different 21. Contractor's Title to Materials 22. Superintendence by Contractor 23. Protection of Work,Persons and Property 24. Representations of Contractor 25. Patent Rights 26. Authority of the Engineer 27. Changes and Alterations 28. Correction of Work 29. Weather Conditions 30. The Owner's Right to Withhold Payments 31. The Owner's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract 32. Contractor's Right to Stop Work or Terminate Contract 33. Responsibility for Work 34. Use of Premises and Removal of Debris 35. Suits of Law 36. Power of the Contractor to Act in an Emergency 37. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 38. Subletting, Successor and Assigns 39. General Municipal Law Clause 40. Grades,Lines,Levels,and Surveys 41. Insurance Requirements 42. Foreign Contractors 43. Lien Law 44. Refusal to Waive Immunity 45., Exemption from Sales and Use Tax CC- 1 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND DEFINITIONS The Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Specifications, Form of Contract, Construction Drawings, together with any Addenda, shall form part of this Contract, and the provisions thereof shall be as binding upon the parties hereto, as if they were herein fully set forth. The table of contents, titles, heading, headlines, and marginal notes contained herein are solely to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect, limit or cast light upon the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Whenever the term "Contract Documents" is used, it shall mean and include the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Specifications, Form of Contract, Construction Drawings and any Addenda. In case of any conflict or inconsistency between the provisions of the Contract and those of the Specifications, the provisions of this Contract shall govern. Extra Work: The term "extra work", as used herein, refers to and includes all work required by the Owner, which in the judgment of the Engineer involves changes in or additions to work required by the Plans, Specifications and any Addenda in their present form and which is not covered by a specific unit price in the Form of Bid. Subcontractor: The term "subcontractor" shall mean any person, firm, or corporation supplying labor and material for work at the site of the project but not including the parties to this Contract. Notice: The term "notice", as used herein, shall mean and include written notice. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served when delivered to, or at last known business address of, the person, firm or corporation for whom intended, or his, their, or its duly authorized agents, representatives, or officer, or when enclosed in a postage prepaid wrapper or envelope addressed to such person, firm or corporation at his, their or its last known business address and deposited in a United States mailbox. Directed,Required, Approved,Acceptable: Whenever they refer to the work or its performance, "directed", "required", "permitted", "ordered", "designated", "prescribed", and words of like import shall imply the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Engineer, and "approved", "satisfied", or "satisfactory", "in the judgment of', and words of like import, shall mean approved, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to, or in the judgment of the Engineer. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK The Contractor will furnish all plant, labor, materials, supplies, equipment and other-facilities and things necessary or proper for, or incidental to, the work contemplated by this Contract as required by, and in strict accordance with the applicable Plans, Specifications and Addenda prepared by the Engineer and/or required by, and in strict accordance with, such changes as are ordered and approved pursuant to this Contract, and will perform all other obligations imposed on him by this Contract. CC-2 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 3, COMPENSATION TO BE PAID TO THE CONTRACTOR (a) Agreed Prices: It is understood and agreed that the Contractor will accept as payment in full f the summation of products of the actual quantities in place upon the completion of the work, as determined by the Engineer's measurements, by the unit prices bid, no allowance being made for anticipated profit or for reasons of variations from the estimated quantities set forth in the Form of Bid. (b) Extra Work: The Owner may, at any time, by a written order and without notice to the Sureties, require the performance of such extra work or changes in the work as it may find necessary or desirable. The amount of compensation to be paid to the Contractor for any extra work, as so ordered, shall be determined as follows: 1)By such applicable unit prices, if any, as set forth in the Contract; or 2) If no such unit prices are set forth, then by unit price or by a lump sum mutually agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor; or 3) If no such unit prices are so set forth and if the parties cannot agree upon unit prices or a lump sum; then by actual net cost in money to the Contractor of the materials, permits, wages of applied labor, premiums for Workmen's Compensation Insurance, payroll taxes required by law, rental for plant and equipment used (excluding small tools) to which total cost will be added twenty (20) percent as full compensation for all other items of profit, costs and expenses, including administration, overhead, superintendence, insurance, insurance other than Workmen's Compensation Insurance, materials used in temporary structures, allowances made by the Contractor to subcontractors, additional premiums upon the performance bond of the Contractor and the use of small tools. 4. TIME OF ESSENCE INASMUCH AS THE PROVISIONS OF THIS CONTRACT RELATING TO THE TIME OF PERFORMANCE AND COMPLETION OF THE WORK ARE FOR THE PURPOSE OF ENABLING THE TOWN TO PROCEED WITH THE CONSTRUCTION OF A PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH A PREDETERMINED PROGRAM, SUCH PROVISIONS ARE OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 5. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK The Contractor agrees that he will commence work immediately on and not later than ten (10) days after signing of the Contract. 6. TIME OF COMPLETION The time of completion of the entire contract work shall be TWO HUNDRED AND SEVENTH' (270) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAB'S from the date the contract is signed by all parties. The date of such completion shall be the date of the Certification of Completion herein specified. The entire work must be satisfactorily completed so that the project improvements are available to the Town for use. CC-3 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT The Owner reserves the right to order the Contractor to suspend operations, when in the opinion of the Engineer, improper weather conditions make such action advisable, and to order the Contractor to resume operations when weather and ground conditions permit. The days during which such suspension of work is in force are not chargeable against the specified completion date. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAYS The time limit being essential to and of the essence of this Contract, the Contractor hereby agrees that the Owner shall be, and is hereby authorized to deduct and retain out of the money which may be due or may become due to said Contractor under this agreement, the sum of One Thousand Five Hundred ($1,500.00) per day which amount is hereby agreed upon, fixed and determined by the parties hereto as the liquidated damages, including overhead charges, services, inspector's wages and interest on the money invested, that the Owner will suffer by reason of such default, for each and every day during which the aforesaid work may be incomplete over and beyond the time herein stipulated for its completion in 6 — Time of Completion, provided, however, that the Owner shall have the right to extend the time for the completion of said work. 3. EXTENSIONS OF TIME. NO WAIVER If the Contractor shall be delayed in the completion of his work by reason of unforeseeable causes beyond his control and without his fault or negligence, including but not restricted to, acts of God or of the public enemy, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes,riots, civil commotion's or freight embargoes, the period herein above specified for completion of his work shall be extended by such time as shall be fixed by the Owner. No such extension of time shall be considered a waiver by the Owner of its right to terminate the Contract for abandonment or delay by the Contractor as hereinafter provided, or relieve the Contractor from full responsibility for performance of his obligations hereunder. 9. WEATHER During unsuitable weather, all work must stop when such work would be subject to injury and the Contractor shall transfer his men and materials to those parts of the work where weather conditions will not have any effect on the workmanship. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages on account of such damages or suspension, and he must protect any work that might be injured by the elements and make good any work that is injured. 10. CONTRACT SECURITY (a) The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond, or other acceptable security, equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the amount of the bid as security for the faithful performance of the Contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. The Performance Bond shall be written so as to remain in full force and effect as a maintenance bond for a period of not less than one (1) year after the date of acceptance of the work by the Engineer. CC -4 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (b) Additional or Substitute Bond: If at any time the Owner shall be or become dissatisfied with any surety or sureties, or if for any other reason such bond shall cease to be adequate security to the Owner, the Contractor shall within five (5) days after notice from the Owner to do so, substitute an acceptable bond in such form and sum and signed by such other surety as may be satisfactory to the Owner. The premiums on such bonds shall be made until the new surety shall have been qualified. 11. LAWS AND ORDINANCES In the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply and obey all federal, state, county and local laws, ordinances, codes and regulations relating to the performance of the Contract, including but not limited to, labor employed thereon, materials supplied, obstructing streets and highways, maintaining signals, storing, handling and use of explosives and all other general ordinances and state statutes affecting him or his employees or his work hereunder in his relations with the Municipality or any other persons, and also all laws, codes, ordinances controlling or limiting the Contractor while engaged in executing the work under the Contract. As a condition of the Contract, the Contractor shall and does hereby agree to comply with all requirements of the labor laws of the State of New York. The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Sections 291- 299 of the Executive Law and Civil Rights Law, shall furnish all information and reports deemed necessary by the State Commission for Human Rights, the Attorney General and the Industrial Commissioner for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such sections of the Executive Law and Civil Rights Law. The Contract may be forthwith cancelled, terminated or suspended, in whole or in part, by the contracting agency upon the basis of a finding made by the State Commission for Human Rights that the Contractor has not complied with these laws. The Contractor hereby expressly agrees to comply with all the provisions of the Labor Law and any and all amendments thereto, insofar as the same are applicable to this Contract. The Labor Law, as amended, provides that no laborer, workman or mechanic in the employ of the i Contractor, subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do,the whole or a part of the work contemplated by this Contract, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight (8) hours in any one (1) calendar day, except in cases of extraordinary emergency caused by fire, flood or danger to life or property; that no such person shall be employed more than eight (8) hours in any day or more than five (5) days in any week expect in such emergency; that the wages to be paid for a legal day's work as herein before defined, to laborers, workmen or mechanics upon the work called for under this Contract or upon any material used upon, or in .connection therewith, shall not be less than the prevailing rate for a day's work in the same trade or occupation in the locality within the state where such work is to be done and each laborer, workman or mechanic employed by the Contractor, subcontractor or other person about or upon the work shall be paid the wages herein provided; that employees engaged in the construction, maintenance, and repair of highways and in water works construction outside the limits of cities CC-5 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT and villages are no longer exempt from the provisions of the Labor Law which require the payment of the prevailing rate of wages and the eight(8)hour day. Section 222 of the Labor Law, as amended by Chapters 556 and 557 of the Laws of 1933, provides that preference in employment shall be given to citizens of the State of New York who have been residents of Suffolk County for at least six (6) consecutive months immediately prior to the commencement of their employment. Each person so employed shall furnish satisfactory proof of residence in accordance with rules adopted by the Industrial Commissioner. Persons other than citizens of the State of New York shall be employed only when such citizens are not available. Section 222 further provides that upon the demand of the State Industrial Commissioner,the Contractor shall furnish a list of names and addresses of all his subcontractors and further provides that a violation of this section shall constitute a misdemeanor and shall be punishable by a fine of not less than Fifty Dollars ($50.00) nor more than Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) or by imprisonment for not less than thirty nor more than ninety days, or both fine and imprisonment. Section 220-A of the Labor Law, as amended by Chapter 472 of the Laws of 1932,provides that before payment is made by or on behalf of the State of any city, county, town or village or other civil division of the state of any sums due on account of a contract for a public improvement, it is the duty of the Comptroller or the financial officer of the Municipal Corporation to require the Contractor and each and every subcontractor to file a certified statement in writing, in satisfactory form, certifying to the amounts then due and owing to any and all laborers for daily or weekly wages on account of labor performed upon the work of the Contractor, setting forth therein the names of the persons whose wages are unpaid and the amount due each respectively. Section 220-B of the Labor Law, as so amended, provides that any interested person who shall have previously filed a protest in writing objecting to the amounts due or to become due to him for daily or weekly wages for labor performed on the public improvement for which the Contract was entered into, or if for any reason, it may be deemed advisable, the Comptroller of the State or financial officer of the Municipal Corporation may deduct from the whole amount of any payment on account thereof of the sums or sum admitted by any contractor or subcontractor in such statement or statements so filed to be due and owing by him on account of labor performed and may withhold the amount so deducted for the benefit of the laborers for daily or weekly wages, whose wages are unpaid as shown by the verified statements filed by any contractor or subcontractor and may pay directly to any person the amount or amounts so shown to be due for such wages. Section 220-C of the Labor Law, as so amended, provides the penalty for making of a false oath or verification. Section 220-D of the Labor Law provides that the advertised Specifications for every contract for the construction, reconstruction, maintenance and/or repair of highways to which the State, county, town and/or village is a party shall contain a provision stating the minimum rate of hourly wage that can be paid, as shall be designated by the Industrial Commissioner, to the laborers employed in the performance of the Contract either by the Contractor, subcontractor or other person doing or contracting to do the whole or part of the work contemplated by the CC- 6 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Contract, and the Contract shall contain a stipulation that such laborers shall be paid not less than such hourly minimum rate of wage. Any person or corporation that willfully pays, after entering into such Contract, less than such stipulated minimum hourly wage scale shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and upon conviction, shall be punished for a first offense by a fine of Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) or by imprisonment for not more than thirty (30) days, or both by fine and imprisonment; for a second offense by a fine of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) and in addition thereto, the Contract on which the violation has occurred shall be forfeited, and no such person or corporation shall be entitled to receive any sum nor shall any officer, agent or employee of the State pay the same or authorize its payment from the funds under his charge or control to any person or corporation for work done upon any contract, on which the Contractor has been convicted of second offense in violation of the provisions of this section. The minimum wage rates established by the Industrial Commissioner, State of New York, for this Contract are set forth herein above as part of"Instructions to Bidders". 12. QUALIFICATIONS FOR EMPLOYMENT No person under the age of sixteen(16)years and no person currently serving sentence in a penal or correctional institution shall be employed to perform any work on the project under this Contract. No person whose age or physical condition is such as to make his employment dangerous to his health or safety or to the health or safety of others, shall be employed to perform any work on this project; provided, however, that such restrictions shall not operate against the employment of physically handicapped persons, otherwise employable, where each person may be safely assigned to work which they can ably perform. 13. NON-DISCRIMINATION There shall be no discrimination because of race, creed, color, national origin, age or sex in the employment of persons for work under this Contract, whether performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor. Neither shall the Contractor and subcontractor or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor or subcontractor discriminate in any manner against or intimidate any employee hired for the performance of work under this Contract on account of race, creed, color, national origin, age or sex. There may be deducted from the amount payable to the Contractor by the Owner under this Contract a penalty of Five Dollars ($5.00) for each person for each calendar day during which such person was discriminated against or intimidated in violation of the provisions of this paragraph; provided that for a second or any subsequent violation of the terms of this paragraph, this Contact may be canceled or terminated by the Owner and all monies due or to become due hereunder may be forfeited. 14. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES The Contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this Contract in full (less deductions made mandatory by law) in cash or company check and not less often than once each week. CC - 7 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 15. ESTIMATES &PAYMENTS (a) Monthly: At the end of each calendar month during the progress of the work, the Engineer shall make an approximate estimate of the work satisfactorily done, based upon the prices set forth in the Proposal Form. In consideration of the work done, the Owner will pay or cause to be paid to the Contractor the amount estimated by the Engineer as due him less five(5)percent. The making of any such estimate or payment made thereon shall not be taken or construed as an acceptance by the Owner of any work so estimated and paid for. The five percent (5%) of the amount of the monthly estimate remaining unpaid will be retained by the Owner as a guarantee that the Contractor will faithfully and completely fulfill all obligations imposed by the Contract and Specifications, and against any damages caused the Owner by reason of any failure on the part of the Contractor to fulfill all conditions and obligations herein contained. (b) Final Estimate: One month after the completion and acceptance of the work specified and contracted for, the Engineer will make a final estimate of all the work done. Thereafter, the Owner will pay the full amount, less prior payments, less any amounts retained to complete the work according to the provisions of the Specifications, less any money paid by the Owner by reason of said Contractor having failed to carry out faithfully and completely all the obligations and requirements herein contained. Upon final settlement, according to the conditions herein specified and not until such settlement shall have been made, will the Contractor be relieved from the obligations assumed in the Contract. (c) Measurement for Payment: The Engineer shall make due measurement of work done during the progress of the work and his estimate shall be final and conclusive evidence of the amounts of work performed by the Contractor under, and by virtue of, this agreement and shall be taken as full measure of compensation to be received by the Contractor. When requested by the Contractor, the Engineer shall measure, re-measure or re-estimate any portion of the work, but the expense of such re-measurement or re-estimating shall, unless material error is proved, be paid for by the Contractor. (d) No payments will be made for materials delivered to the site which have not been incorporated into the work. (e) Contractors and subcontractors are required to submit to the Town, within thirty days after issuance's of the first payroll, and every thirty days thereafter, a transcript of the original payroll record, subscribed and affirmed as true under the penalties of perjury. CC- 8 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 16. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONSTITUTES RELEASE The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be, and shall operate as a release to the Owner from all claims and all liabilities to the Contractor for all the things done or furnished in connection with this work and for every act and neglect of the Owner and others relating to or arising out of, this work, excepting the Contractor's claims for interest upon the final payment, if this payment be improperly delayed. No payment, however, final or otherwise, shall operate to release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligations under this Contract or the Performance Bond. 17. CONSTRUCTION REPORTS The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer prior to commencing any work under this Contract, a detailed schedule and plan of operations indicating the 'manner in which the Contractor proposes to prosecute the work and a time schedule therefor. Such schedules are not intended to bind the Contractor to a pre-determined plan or procedure, but rather to enable the Engineer to coordinate the work of the Contractor with work required of, and to be performed by others. The detailed schedule shall include a list of the subcontractors and material suppliers he proposes to use on the work. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with periodic estimates for partial payments as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, and in addition thereto will furnish the Engineer with a detailed estimate for final payment. Prior to being eligible to receive the final payment under this Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with substantial proof that all bills for services rendered and materials supplied have been paid. The enumeration of the above reports in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility under existing Federal or State Laws of filing such other reports with agencies as may be required by such existing laws or regulations. 18. INSPECTION AND TESTS All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and test by the Engineer at any time during the construction and at any and all places where manufacturing of materials used and/or construction is carried on. Without additional charge, Contractor shall furnish promptly all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary to make any tests required by the Engineer and/or required by the Specifications. If at any time before final acceptance of the entire work, the Engineer considers necessary or advisable an examination of any portion of the work already completed, by removing or tearing out the same, the Contractor shall upon request, furnish promptly all necessary facilities, labor and materials for such examination. If such work is found to be defective in any material CC -9 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT respect, due to the fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, or if any work shall be covered over without the approval or consent of the Engineer, whether or not the same shall be defective, the Contractor shall be liable for the expense for such examination and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such approval and consent shall have been given and such work is found to meet the requirements of this Contract, the Contractor shall be recompensed for the expense of such examination and reconstruction in the manner herein provided for the payment of cost of extra work. The selection of laboratories and/or agencies for the inspection and tests of supplies,materials or equipment shall be subject to the approval of or designated by the Owner. Satisfactory documentary evidence that the material has passed the required inspection and tests must be furnished to the Engineer prior to the incorporation of the material in the work. Any rejected work will be removed'from the site of the project completely at the expense of the Contractor. 19. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: INTERPRETATIONS The Contractor shall keep at the site of the work one copy of the Plans and Specifications signed and identified by the Engineer. Anything shown on the Plans and not mentioned in the Specifications or mentioned in the Specifications and not shown in the Plans shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. In case of any conflict or inconsistency between the Plans and Specifications, the Specifications shall govern. Any discrepancy between the figures and drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer whose decision thereon shall be conclusive. 20. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS FOUNT)DIFFERENT Should the Contractor encounter subsurface conditions at the site materially differing from those shown on the Plans or indicated in the Specifications, he shall immediately give notice to the Engineer of such conditions, before they are disturbed; the Engineer shall thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if he finds that they materially differ from those shown on the Plans or indicated on the Specifications, he shall at once make such changes in the Plans and/or Specifications as he may find necessary. Any increase or decrease of cost resulting from such changes will be adjusted in the manner provided herein for adjustment as, to extra and/or additional work and changes. 21. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS No materials or supplies for the work shall be purchased by the Contractor or any subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the work. CC - 10 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 22. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR At the site of the work, the Contractor shall give his constant, personal attention to the work or employ a construction superintendent or foreman who shall have full authority to act for the Contractor. It is understood that such representative shall be acceptable to the Engineer and shall be one who can be continued in that capacity for the particular job involved unless he ceases to be on the Contractor's payroll. The Contractor's superintendent and foreman must be able to read and speak the English language. 23. PROTECTION OF WQRK,PERSONS ANIS PROPERTY Precaution shall be exercised at all times for the proper protection of all persons, property and work. The Contractor shall give notice to the owners of utilities which may serve the area and request their assistance in predetermining the location and depth of various pipes, conduits, manholes, and other underground facilities. The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment and all hazards shall be guarded or eliminated in accordance with the safety provisions of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction published by the Associated General Contractors of America, to the extent that such provisions are not in contravention of applicable law. The Contractor shall furnish entirely at his own expense any and all additional safety measures deemed necessary by the Owner or his Engineer to adequately safeguard the traveling public. The Contractor shall, at all hours of the day, safely guard and protect his own work and adjacent property from any damage and shall replace or make good any such damage, loss or injury, unless such be caused directly by errors contained in the Contract Documents, or by the Owner or its duly authorized representatives. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such watchmen, barriers, lights, flares and other signals at his own expense, as will effectively prevent any accident in consequence of his work for which the Owner might be liable. The Contractor shall be liable for all injuries or damage caused by his act or neglect, or that of his employees. The Contractor shall take particular care to avoid the blocking of fire hydrants, fire alarm boxes, letterboxes,traffic signals or other visible devices maintained for the use of the public. 24. REPRESENTATIONS OF CONTRACTOR The Contractor represents and warrants: (a) That he is financially solvent and that he is experienced in, and competent to, perform the type of work involved under this Contract and able to furnish the plant,materials, supplies and/or equipment to be furnished for the work; and CC - 11 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT (b) That he is familiar with all Federal, State and Municipal Law, ordinances and regulations which may in any way affect the work of those employed hereunder, including but not limited to any special acts relating to the work; and (c) That such work required by these Contract Documents as is to be done by him can be satisfactorily constructed and used for the purpose for which is intended and that such construction will not injure any person or damage any property; and (d) That he has carefully examined the Plans, Specifications and the site of the work, and that from his own investigations he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the character, location, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials, structures and utilities likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the work, the general local conditions which may in any way affect the work or its performance. 25. PATENT RIGHTS As part of his obligation hereunder and without any additional compensation, the Contractor will pay for any patent fees or royalties required in respect to the work or any part thereof and will fully indemnify the Owner or his Engineer for any loss on account of any infringement of patent rights unless prior to his use in the work a particular process or a product of a particular manufacturer he notifies the Engineer in writing that such process or product is an infringement of a patent. 26. AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER In the performance of the work, the Contractor shall abide by all orders and directions and requirements of the Engineer and shall perform work to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at such time and places, by such methods, and in such manner and sequence as he may require. The Engineer shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of all parts of the work, shall interpret the Plans, Specifications, Contract Documents and any extra work orders and shall decide all other questions in connection with the work. Upon request, the Engineer shall confirm in writing any oral orders, directions,requirements or determinations. The enumeration herein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents of particular instance in which the opinion, judgment, discretion or determination of the Engineer shall control or in which work shall be performed to his satisfaction or subject to his approval or inspection, shall not imply that only matters similar to those enumerated shall be so governed and performed,but without exception all the work shall be governed and so performed. 27. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Owner, upon the Engineers recommendation, reserves the right to make alterations in location, line, grade, plan, form or dimensions of the work, or any part thereof, either before or after the commencement of construction. If such alterations diminish the amount of work to be done, no claim for damages or anticipated profits will be warranted on the work, which may be dispensed with. If such alterations increase the amount of work, such increases shall be paid for CC- 12 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT according,to the quantity,of work actually done and at the prices for such work as contained in the schedule of prices. 28. CORRECTION OF WORD All work and all materials whether incorporated into the work or not, all processes of manufacture and all methods of construction shall be at all times and places subject to the inspection of the Engineer who shall be the final,judge of quality; materials, processes of - manufacture and methods of construction suitable for the purpose for which they are used. Should they fail to meet his approval, they shall be forthwith reconstructed, made good and replaced and/or corrected as the case maybe,by the Contractor, at his own expense. If, in the 'opinion of the Engineer, it is not desirable to replace any�defective or damaged 1 materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed 'in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the .Contractor hereunder shall be reduced by such amount as'in the judgment of the Engineer shall be equitable. The Contractor expressly warrants that his work shall be free from any defects in materials or workmanship and agrees to correct any, defects, which may appear within one year following the fmal completion of the work. Neither the acceptance of,the completed work nor payment therefor shall operate to release the Contractor or his sureties from any obligations under or upon this Contract or the Performance Bond. 29. WEATHER CONDITIONS In the event of temporary suspension of work or'during inclement weather or whenever the Engineer shall direct, the Contractor will, and will cause his subcontractors-to protect carefully his and their work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If in the opinion of the Engineer any work or material shall have been,damaged or injured by reason of failure on the J part'of the Contractor.or any of his subcontractors to protect his or their work, such'work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 30. THE OWNER'S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD PAYMENTS The Owner may withhold from,the Contractor so much of any approved payments due him as 4 may, in the judgment of the Owner,be necessary:, (a) To assure the payment.of just claims then due and unpaid of any,persons supplying labor or materials for the work; (b)To protect the Owner from loss due to defective work not remedied; or (c)To protect the Owner from loss due to injury to persons or damage to the work or property of other contractors or subcontractors or others, caused by the act or neglect of the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. The Owner shall have the right, as agent for the Contractor to apply such amounts so withheld in such manner as the Owner may deem proper to satisfy such claims CC - 13 CONDITIOI'oTTS OF CONTRACT or to secure such protection. Such applications of such money shall be deemed payments for the account of the Contractor. 31. THE OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT If, (a)The Contractor shall be adjudged bankrupt or make an assignment for the benefit of creditors; or (b)A receiver or liquidator shall be appointed for the Contractor for any of his property and shall not be dismissed within 20 days after such appointment, or the proceedings in connection therewith shall not be stayed on appeal within the said 20 days; or (c) The Contractor shall refuse or fail, after notice or warning from the Engineer, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; or (d) The Contractor shall refuse or fail to prosecute the work or any part thereof with such diligence as will insure its completion within the periods herein specified(or any duly authorized extension thereof) or shall fail to complete the work within said periods; or (e) The Contractor shall fail to make prompt payments to persons supplying labor or materials for the work; or (f) The Contractor shall fail or refuse to regard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the Engineer or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provisions of this Contract; then and in any such event, the Owner, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy it may have, may by seven(7) days'notice to the Contractor, terminate the employment of the Contractor and his rights to proceed either as to the entire work or(at the option of the Owner) as to any portion thereof as to which delay shall have occurred, and may take possession of the work and complete the work by contract or otherwise, as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor will not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the compensation to be paid the Contractor hereunder shall exceed the expense of so completing the work(including compensation for additional managerial, administrative and inspection services and any damages for delay), such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor and his sureties shall be liable to the Owner for such excess. If the right of the Contractor to proceed with the work is so terminated,the Owner may take possession of and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances, supplies, plant and equipment as may be on the site of the work and necessary thereof. If the Owner does not so terminate the right of the Contractor to proceed, the Contractor shall continue to work. CC - 14 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 32. 'CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT If the work shall be stopped by order of the Court or other public authority for a period of three (3) months without act or fault of the Contractor or any of his agents, servants, employees or subcontractors, the Contractor may, upon ten (10) days' _notice to the Owner, discontinue his performance of the work and/or terminate the Contract; in which event,the liability of the Owner to the Contractor shall be determined as provided in•Paragraph 31. The Contractor shall not be obligated to pay to the Owner any excess of the expense of completing the work over the unpaid balance of the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder. '33. RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK The Contractor agrees to be responsible for the entire work embraced in this Contract until its completion and final acceptance, and,that any unfaithful or imperfect work that may become damaged from any cause either by act of commission or omission to properly guard and protect the work that may be discovered at any time before the completion and acceptance shall be removed and replaced by good.and satisfactory work without any charge-to the Owner, and that such,removal and replacement will be performed immediately on the requirement of the Engineer,,notwithstanding the fact that it.may have been overlooked by the proper inspector, and partial payment made thereon. It is fully understood by the Contractor,that the inspection,of the work shall not relieve him of any obligation to do sound and,reliable work as herein prescribed, and that any,omission to disapprove any work by the.Engineer at or before the time of partial payment or other estimate shall not be construed to be acceptance of any,defective work. 34. USE OF,PREMISES AND REMOVAL OF,DEBRIS The Contractor expressly undertakes at his own expense: (a)To store his apparatus,materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at,the site of the work as will not unduly interfere with,the progress of his work or the work of any of his _ subcontractors; (b)To frequently clean up all refuse,rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by the operations to the end that at all times, the site of the work shall,present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance; (c)Before final payment hereunder to remove all surplus material,temporary structures,plants of any description and debris of every nature resulting from his operations. 35. SUITS OF LAW The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from and against all suits, claims, demands or actions for any injury,sustained or alleged to be sustained by any party or,parties in connection with the construction of the work or any part thereof, or any commission or omission of the contractor,,his-employees or agents of any subcontractor, and in case of any such action shall be brought against the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately take charge of and defend the same at his own cost and expense. CC - is CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT , 36. POWER OF THE CONTRACTOR TO ACT IN AN EMERGENCY In case of an, emergency, which threatens loss or injury to property and/or safety of life, the Contractor wil be permitted to act as,he sees fit without previous instructions from the Engineer. He shall notify the Engineer thereof immediately and any compensation claimed by the Contractor due to extra work made necessary because of his acts in such emergency shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Where the Contractor has not taken action but has notified the Engineer of an emergency indicating injury to persons or damage to adjoining property or to the work being accomplished under this Contract, then upon authorization from the Engineer to prevent such threatened injury or damage,'he shall act as instructed by the Engineer.`The amount of reimbursement claimed by the Contractor on account of any such action shall.be determined in the manner provided herein for the payment of extra work. ; 37. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTED Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract shall read and be enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the Contract shall be'forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 38. SUBLETTING,SUCCESSOR AND ASSIGNS The Contractor shall not sublet any part of the work under this Contract nor assign any money due him hereunder without first obtaining the written consent of the Owner. This Contract shall insure the benefit of and shall be binding upon the parties hereunder and upon their respective successors and assigns, but neither party shall assign or transfer his interest herein in whole or in part without consent of the other. 39. GENERAL MUNICIPAL LAW CLAUSE Pursuant to the provisions of Section 103-a of the General Municipal Law, in the event that the Bidder or any member, partner, director or-officer of the Bidder, should refuse, when called before-a grand jury to testify concerning any transaction or contract had with the State, any political subdivision thereof, a public authority or any public Department, agency or official of the State or of any political subdivision thereof or of a public authority, to sign a waiver of immunity against subsequent criminal prosecution or to answer any relevant question concerning such transaction or contract, such person, and any firm,partnership, or corporation of which he is a member,partner, director or officer shall be disqualified from thereafter selling to or submitting bids to or receiving awards from or entering into any contracts with any municipal corporation or any public Department, agency or official thereof for goods, work or services for a period of five '(5) years'after such refusal, and any and all contracts made with any municipal corporation or J any public Department, agency or official thereof on or after the first day of July, 1959, by such CC- 16 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT person, and by any firm,partnership or corporation of which he is a member,partner, director or officer may be cancelled or terminated by the municipal corporation without incurring any penalty or damages on account of such cancellation or termination,but any monies owing by the municipal corporation for goods delivered or work done prior to the cancellation or termination shall be paid. 40. GRADES,LINES,LEVELS AND SURVEY'S The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with the basic horizontal and vertical controls from which the Contractor shall transfer and stake his lines and grades and for their accuracy. The Engineer will establish the basic horizontal and vertical controls at the start of the work, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to safeguard such controls; and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, these controls are damaged or destroyed either in whole or in part, the Contractor shall pay the cost of having the damaged controls verified, checked, corrected or replaced. 41. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall not commence work until the Town has approved all the insurance required under this Contract as required immediately following the Instructions to Bidders. Additionally, the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Town of Southold from and against all losses and all claims, demands, payments, suits, actions, recoveries and judgments of every kind or nature,brought or recovered against the Town of Southold by reason of any act or omission of the Contractor,his agent or employees in the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit any subcontractor to commence any work under this contract until satisfactory proof of carriage of the required insurance has been posted with and approved by the Town. 42. FOREIGN CONTRACTORS Foreign Contractors must comply with the provisions of Articles 9A and 16 of the Tax Law, as amended, prior to submission of a bid for the performance of this work. The certificate of the New York State Tax Commission to the effect that all taxes have been paid by the foreign contractor shall be conclusive proof of the payment of taxes. The term "foreign contractor" as used in this subdivision means in the case of an individual, a person who is a legal resident of another state or foreign country; and in the case of a foreign corporation, one organized under the laws of a state other than the State of New York. 43. LIEN LAW Attention of all persons submitting bids is specifically called to the provisions of Section 25, Subdivision 5, Section 25A and 25B of the Lien Law, as amended, in relation to funds being received by a contractor for a public improvement declared to constitute trust funds in the hands of such Contractor to be applied first to the payment of certain claims. CC - 17 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 44. REFUSAL TO WAIVE IMMUNITY Pursuant to the provisions of Section 103=A of the General Municipal Law, in the event that the bidder or any member;partner, director or-officer of the bidder, should refuse when called before a grand jury to testify concerning any transaction or contract had with the State, any political subdivision thereof, a public authority or with any public department, agency or official of the State or of any political subdivision thereof or of an authority, to sign a waiver of immunity against subsequent criminal prosecution or to answer any relevant question concerning such transaction or contract, such person, and any,firm, partnership or corporation of which he is a member, partner, firm director or officer shall be disqualified from thereafter selling to or submitting bids to or receiving awards from or entering into any contracts with any municipal corporation or any public department, agency, or official thereof, for goods, work or services,.for a period of five (5) years after such 'refusal, and any and all contracts made with any municipal corporation or any public department, agency, or official thereof on or after the first day of July, 1959,by such person and any firm, partnership or corporation of which he is a member,partner, director or officer may be cancelled or terminated by the municipal corporation without incurring any penalty or damages on account of such cancellation or termination,but any monies owing by the municipal corporation for goods delivered or work done prior to the cancellation or termination shall be paid. 45. EXEMPTION FROM SALES AND USE TAXES In accordance with Chapter 513 of the laws of 1974 adopted by the New York State Legislature, amending Section 1115 (a) of the tax, law, specifically paragraphs 15 and 16, political subdivisions, as described in subdivision(a)paragraph(L) of section 1116 of the tax laws, of the State of New York are'exempt from the payment of sale's and use taxes imposed on tangible personal property within the limitations specified in tax law 1'115 (a)(15)and(16). (15) Tangible personal property sold to a contractor, subcontractor or repairman for use in erecting a structure or building of an organization described in subdivision(a)of section 1116, or adding to, altering or improving real property, property or land of such an organization, as the terms real property, property and land are defined in the real property'tax law; provided, however,no exemption shall exist under this paragraph unless suchtangible personal property is to become an integral component part of such structure,building or real property. (16) Tangible personal property•sold to a contractor 'or repairman for use Mr maintaining, servicing or repairing real property, or land of ad organization described in subdivision (a) of section 1116, as the terms real property,property or land are'defined in the real property tax law; provided, however, no exemption shall exist under this paragraph unless such tangible personal property is to become an integral component part of such structure,building or real property. Contractors entering into Contract with'the Town'of Southold shall be exempt from payment of sales and use tax as described above. Procedures and forms are available to the Contractor direct from the Instructions and Interpretations Unit, State of New York, Department of Taxation and Finance, State Campus,Albany,New York, 12227. CC - is Town ®f Southold "Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements" PROPOSAL PACKAGE -- BID OPENS.- November 129 2015 REMINDER NOTE!!64 v VENDORS DUST RETURN THIS DOCUMENT INTACT AND FILLED OUT COMPLETELY! ! (Do Not Sign the Contract Agreement. It is included only for informational purposes, and will be signed by the successful bidder after award of contract.) All line items on the Proposal Form must be filled in! All lines must have an indication of the bidder's response whether it is a dollar figure or No Bid. Please DO NOT remove any pages from this bid package! ! ! Thank you! Proposal Package 1 of 13 BIDDER'S CHECK LIST Your response to our above referenced bid will be considered unresponsive and will be rejected if the following forms are not included at the time of the bid opening. ❑ Notarized Affidavit of Non-Collusion as required by NYS Law. ❑ A Bid Deposit in the amount of Five Percent of Bid Price as required in the Invitation to Bid. ❑ As per specifications, the Town of Southold requires a current insurance certificate, with the Town of Southold listed as additional insured, to be on file in the Purchasing Department. You will be given ten (10)business days from notice of award to supply this form or the bid will be rescinded. ❑ Vendor Information Sheet and Address Record Form. ❑ Assumed Name Certiication. ❑ Bidder's Qualification Statement. NOTE: Please do NOT sign the Contract Agreement. It is included only for informational purposes, and will be signed by the successful bidder after award of the contract. Proposal Package 2 of 13 VENDOR NAME: VENDOR INFORMATION SHEEN' TYPE OF ENTITY:CORP. ✓ PARTNERSHIP INDIVIDUAL FEDERAL EMPLOYEE ID OR SOCIAL SECURITY#: DATE OF ORGANIZATION: c0 eA q�� IF APPLICABLE: DATE FILED: STATE FILED: If a non-publicly owned Corporation: CORPORATION NAME: Co fir= 0Y e_\ LIST PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS: (5% of outstanding shares) LIST OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS: NAME TITLE i�tesicAev�� i ►�,a��y''�c.�--�i. 0�1��1f,.,� ice, �y�e�i r1.nA 4` c'Arww_ 0' �1 Secy eav�<< mea©a®moa®seen®�®®aamodaoaaaamameammaaa®eaa®ma®aaaaommoamoam�aaa�amneam�a■ma�mam■ If a partnership: PARTNERSHIP NAME: LIST PARTNERS NAMES: Proposal Package 3 of 13 ADDRESS RECORD FORM MAIL, EI ) TO: VENDOR NAME: �nee c ADDRESS: Q • �on q�7 _ So 0 yd qx'l' N\./ 111M CONTACT: �brnald `�• ' rl�ov, TELEPIIONE: (Q 31--74q Q 0.7 FAX: 6 1- 4t/--d 9.--k E-MAIL: @J..RAQy0•i Vie- ul let , ONLY if different- MAIL,PURCHASE ORDER TO: ADDRESS: TELEPIIONE: FAX: CONTACT: - E-MAIL: ONLY if different - MAIL PAYMENT TO: ADDRESS: , TELEPHONE: FAX: CONTACT: E-MAIL: Proposal Package 4 of 13 VENDOR NAIVIE:- On ASSUMED NAME CERTIFICATION *If the business is conducted under an assumed name, a copy of the certificate required to be filed under the New York general business law must be attached. ASSUMED NAME: If the bidder is an individual, the bid must be signed by that individual; if the bidder is a corporation, by an officer of the corporation, or other person authorized by resolution of the board of directors, and in such case a copy of the resolution must be attached; if a partnership, by one of the partners or other person authorized by a writing signed by at least one general partner and submitted with the bid or previously filed with the Purchasing Agent. The submission of this constitutes a certification that no Town Officer has any interest therein. (Note: In the event that any Town Officer has any such interest, the full nature thereof should be disclosed below. It is not forbidden that individuals working for the Town of Southold or other municipality bid on contracts only that such interest be revealed when they do bid.) INSURANCE STATEMENT Bidder agrees as follows -please mark appropriate box: Insurance Certificate as requested is attached I certify that I can supply insurance as specified if awarded the bid Insurance Certificate filed on 1� DATE FAILURE TO PROVIDE SPECIFIED INSURANCE SHALL DISQUALIFY BIDDER. ® AUTHORIZ SIGNATURE �ot�Q1U �, Oi}�,Y1t4vl, ��'SiC�eM.T L Proposal Package 5 of 13 i 0 AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION I hereby attest that I am the person responsible within my firm for the final decision as to the prices(s) and amount of this bid or, if not, that I have written authorization, enclosed herewith, from that person to make the statements set out below on his or her behalf and on behalf of my firm. I further attest that: 1. The price(s) and amount of this bid have been arrived at independently, without consultation, j communication or agreement for the'purpose of restricting competition with any other contractor,bidder or potential bidder. 2. Neither the price(s), nor the amount of this bid,have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a bidder or potential bidder on this project, and will not be so disclosed prior to bid opening. 3. No attempt has, been made or will be made to solicit, cause or induce any firm or person to refrain from bidding on this project, or to submit a bid higher than the bid of this firm, or any intentionally high or non-competitive bid or other form of complementary bid. 4. The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or inducement from any firm or person to submit a complementary bid. i, 5. My firm has not offered,or entered into- a.subcontract,or agreement regarding the purchase of materials:or services from .any other firm or person, or -offered, promised or paid .cash or anything of value to any firm or,person, whether in connection with this or any other•project, in consideration for an agreement or promise by.an firm or person to refiain from bidding or to submit a complementary bid on this project. 6. My firm has not accepted or-be'en promised any subcontract or agreement regarding the sale of .materials or services to any film or.person, and has not been promised or paid cash or anything of value by ariy firm or person,I whether in connection with this or.any project, in consideration for my firm's submitting a complementary bid, or agreeing to do so, on this project. 7. I have made a diligent inquiry of all members, officers, employees, and agents of my firm with responsibilities relating.to the preparation, approval or submission of my firm's bid on this project and have been advised by each of them -that he or she has not participated in any i communication, consultation, discussion, agreement, collusion, act or other conduct inconsistent with any of the statements and representations'made in this affidavit. The person sign this bid,under the penalties of perjury, affirms the truth thereof. SWORN TO BEFORE ME THIS S nature&Company Po ition 0 y d ,T. !I-ed o v1; rY'�zl/d�p�I QDAY OF 20_t,� Type Name&Company Position Com an Name �(�LI P Y --crK10TARY U�3LIC r '^. KI Oki Date Signed py y :�° i''``-4,•'•;; �`CT�q �n2�"1 �°e$.E"eibrti�uitJe7 E-woo 0'�!i 1lo90l9 Federal I.D.Number Proposal Package 6 of 13 THE PROPOSAL FORM u Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements VENDOR NAME: (�„�,r�e�- W)Oey\Ce_ i 1--n 6 . l� VENDOR ADDRESS: -_ 3'-'0. U nu 907 c �rQ PLl r� k / I I-J N TELEPHONE NUMBER: ( 3I. FAX: • i The undersigned bidder has carefully examined the Contract Documents and will provide all necessary labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as necessary and called for in the said Contract Documents in the manner prescribed therein and in said Contract, and in accordance with the requirements of the Engineer, at the prices listed on the attached Bid Proposal Form. If the bidder is an individual, the bid must be signed by that individual; if the bidder is a corporation, the bid must be signed by an officer of the corporation, or other person authorized by resolution of the board of directors, and in such case a copy of the resolution must be attached; if a partnership, by one of the partners or, other person authorized by a writing signed by at least one general partner and submitted with the bid documents. The submission of this constitutes a certification that no Town Officer has any interest therein. (Note: In the event that any Town Officer has any such interest, the full nature thereof should be disclosed below. It is not forbidden that individuals worlcing for the Town of Southold or other municipalities bid on contracts,but only that such interest be revealed when they do bid.) - i The undersigned hereby acknowledges°receipt of the following Addenda(if none were issued please write N/A below): Addendum No. Dated Proposal Package 7 of 13 Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract A-General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LKMA#•13108 000 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS General Conditions&Site Mobilization Al 1 for �y\e— A l\f2 1oU�,Qy�l� /LS Jbi0O(D O0 QjS060 ov Dollars No Cents Site Preparation and Removals A2 1 for /LS ,�,O/Ooo DO Dollars v N e Cents Unclassified Excavation&Grading A3 1 for-TEy\ �\ILb�SczytC�l /Ls 101000 ov (0,00b ov Dollars k uv;,Cents Budding Construction A4 1 �y1z 1V\t\\�� �ro�r � XU Sever f '-E37oovo0 1, H371000 00 for `rv3w.2SasVa /LS ) 1 Dollars .h 1)3 Cents 8"Thick Reinforced Exterior Concrete Slab A5 4,800 for We. /SF 0 (fir ��,� 850 L70 D Ilars _ Cents 4"Thick Concrete Sidewalk o A6 800 ( o for '..1) � C, /SF �' �j �� G 0 oc� �— Dollars Cents CD � y oConcrete Curb < crq A7 70 co for S E�1 v1 P/Gi /LF O 3, 9q-7 0 0 No 0 Dollars Cents HiAhwav Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract A-"General Construction' _ Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LICMA#:13108.000" I NO ESTIMATED - -DESCRIPTION OF ITEM 'UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS t General Conditions&Site Mobilization Al 1 for /LS Dollars Cents i Site Preparation and Removals i A2 1 for /LS ars Cents Unclassi i Excavation&Grading A3 l for ILS 'Dollars, Cents" Building Construction A4 1 for /LS Dollars Cents 8"Thick Reinforced Exterior Concrete Slab A5 4,000 for /SF Dollars Cents 4"Thick Concrete Sidewalk o A6 340 - EL for tl /SF Dollars Cents CDD Concrete Curb _ 00 A7 70 for _ /LF w Dollars Cents e 60Ak Ah Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract A-General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LKMA#:13108.000 ITEM NO ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS Septic System A8 1 for +�1�C�T VI :�L-,OSaNJ !LS 1�} 000 oc 00C 00 1 Dollars k \) Cents Drainage System A9 30 for l�t� r\�y\Lllrec� l�C`tto �IX NF CC) i G�-o Ob Dollars Cents 8"ADS Drainage Pipe A10 375 ` for �-"tj �'�r n'\\n 1LF �7 UL Ilars N o Cents TOTAL BASE BID Items(Add All Items) Owe 1ti��\�� E,v� SeVero� \kA-4 e-A Dollars A- Cents (Numerically) WRITTEN IN WORDS Resinous Flooring Alt1 1 for ��1lCV[A �i�� 1 YIoy( GANJ/Ls �g,oOvUo ou d ,0 o Dollars �}- Cents N NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase,decrease,or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or CL after award of the bid. o � < UD yl N 0 (h W C- C Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract A-General Construction Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LKNiA 4:13108.000 �NOESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS Septic System A8 for /LS Dollars Cents Drainage System A9 30 for NF Dollar Cents 8"ADS nage Pipe A10 375 - for /LF Dollars ents TOTAL BASE BID ltems`(Add All Items) DollarsCents (Numerically) WRITTEN IN WORDS Alt 1 1 Resinous Flooring b 0 o for /LS a^ Dollars Cents NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase,decrease,or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or w after award of the bid. a0ro 0 s Alk Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract B-HVAC Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LKMA#:13108.000 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS B1 1 General Conditions&Site Mobilization for�rOV�!4 ViVe'"_ rrloC lcw ILS `fEi-() )U 00 4SJ000 00 Dollars R %k/a Cents 62 Building Heating,Cooling and Ventilation Systems 1 for o-'r 1 Jdved fWZA t 5ey� `VVI0QSa AfJ 1LS a7C�f� tea �f� 7 X00 0 Dollars My•Cents TOTAL BID Items(Add All Items) -Ta-0 r i�cRy�cR�^�cr� SeV e+n�-t�' �C`w�: `Y�lo J ScenR[x ODa ,�Q Dollars J WRITTEN IN WORDS -t No Cents (Numerically) _ NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase,decrease,or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or after award of the bid. 0 0 rn m - b w 0 x o 0 M - _ - W Aft Ak dk An Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department Contract C-Plumbing LKIVIA#:13108.000 ITEM NO. ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill In Unit Price Written In Words) DOLLARS CENTS DOLLARS CENTS General Conditions&Site Mobilization C1 for ,.)Z -(! SP 4j.2 9j1 TV 10 v S0.bLU /LS00© OU `mac y X17 Gib OD Dollars K N3 o Cents C2 Gas Service 1 for^ /LS `Do.;aDD (Q,3�OGa DO Dollars X ,p Cents C3 Water Service 1 for •9L oQ!&Gt,ij /LS 16 000 Oo )6/00o p (-, i Dollars -C' N D Cents C4 Building Plumbing Systems 1 for_()Y1`e- ruy4recA Ci ►C�(l��a TI)JO ►V1oOSa,ji-s �'0 00 00 /000 CaCC TOTAL BID Items(Add All Items) Dollars 16 Cents �5je 'e V-A Dollars J a� 0 Cents 0 00 �d WRITTEN IN WORDS (Numerically) 0 0 0 NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase,decrease,or eliminate in its entirety any or all items prior to or W after award of the bid. b m n tra w 0 0 -n w Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Contract D-Electrical Itemized Proposal for: Town of Southold Highway Department LKMA#:13108.000 ITEM NO ESTIMATED DESCRIPTION OF ITEM UNIT BID PRICE EXTENDED AMOUNT BID QUANTITY (Fill in Unit Price Written in Words) DOLLARS _ CENTS DOLLARS CENTS -General Conditions&Slte Mobilization D1 1 yr;` Inn c�Scc t�cQ /LS 1 �ob o0 "ov o(� Dollars k'N Cents Underground Electric Service D2 O UO O 6 forW C�.YIA ! \V`@� �'�/iC�y SG°vYld ILS 9-3,006 O O Dollars k G. Cents Fiber Optic Line D3 1 for (.j[�` -6\0o Chop /LS 400O 00 f0�l7f�(a 0i) Dollars k Cents D4 Budding Electrical&Communication Systems 1 - for_(DY1?_. Six / c- kdLS 1'o clo o 0 I(U 1,o bo a o Dollars /a Cents D5 Bulldirig Fire Alarm Systems 1 � Ny( e for 4'L2Vt, -Vho�.V\A /LS - 1 910cb OU -f9j00 ©b - ' . .� • d TOTAL BID Items(Add All Items) DollaPs Cents o ri a tP�� X00 L Dollars k.° Ni,.Cents (Numerically) x WRITTEN IN WORDS w NOTE: The Town of Southold reserves the right to increase,decrease,or eliminate in its entirety any or al items prior to or N after award of the bid. w I AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE PRINT NAME TITLE DATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF ss,: 1. i On the-!a;" day of in the year 201.E before me, the undersigned, personally appeared,.T0y�A& -10i (i_N\d" , personally known to me or proved to me on,the basis. of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s)is (ate,subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/sloe/they executed the same in his/herltheir i, capacity(i-es), and that by his/h4a-A4eir--signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instiument. 1 ' NO AR PUBLI I °fora • �`id`E3leBi[u.":'.�il L.k�33i'(:.;3`G�i u���1/ I 41 i Proposal Package 13 of 13 1/ 1 _ Town of Southold BIDDER'S QUALIFICATION STATE,ME The signatory of this questionnaire certifies under oath the truth and correctness of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made. SUBMITTED BY: 3)ov Corporation A Partnership or Entity FIRM NAME: Ca er-BVI�e f ecce��. An Individual I PRINCIPAL OFFICE: 104 New +"-�A Vp- m- 90 SourJ egc�n NSI II�$g _1 PRINCIPAL OFFICERS: BACKGROUND TITLE NAME ADDRESS PROFESSION/TRADE -j reSiAe.v- �ov�\d-S O`4��v�\or. `Y\Mer!0l0-u– ivy Nl'7GL4 Cons: - X4401, y-\c2p�es�G�e�� � 'c'�c�-e- O'A)mXxbn, So-ynd,-!R"NJ 1-781 CArnsiyoC-�i an 1 . jeUc e a.Cl� C-OL 10 CJ*r,\ovn , So"nd t3 e4� N� 117�q otf�vhin►S~�ra-�-i ot,, 1. How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name? a(� rl, 2. You normally perform what percent of the work with your own forces? % List trades that you organization normally performs below: �Y-�e�Y`�Y� �i�e.G�t' CA�� 1,-cbo�e�r� �a.►n���n.52 }�� _ 1 `1 3. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? 0, .If so,note where and why. 41 4. Are there any claims,judgments,arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your firm or its officers?If yes,please provide details. o 41 QS-1 11 11 5_ Has your firm requested arbitration or filed any lawsuits with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? If yes, please provide details. No 6. List the major construction projects your organization has underway at this date: Name of: Engineer/ Project Owner Architect Contract Percent Scheduled Name Telephone# Telephone# Amount CqM fete Completion Restoration of Canoe Place Chapel $284,700.00 30% 01/16 (631)283-6000 Town of Southampton (631)283-1944 Jeffrey P.Gibbons Architect,P.C. Montauk Comfort Station Interior Renov. $56,000.00 20% 01/16 �) (631)324-4183 Town of East Hampton (631)907-0023 D.B.Bennett,P.E.,P.C. Town Hwy.Office Renovations $221,000.00 80% 12/15 (631)324-4183 Town of East Hampton (631)907-0023 D.B.Bennett,P.E.,P.C. New Roof at the Annex Building $721,116.00 03% 07/16 /1 (631)265-2499 Hauppauge Fire District (631)471-9500 Enspire Design Group,LLC 7. List five major projects you organization has completed in the past five years: Name of: Engineer/ Work Done Project Owner Architect Contract Date of With Own Forces Name Telephone# Telephone# Amount Completion % of Work Mastic Beach Fire District $228,000.00 10/05/15 (631)281-9840; Richard Shure,R.A. (631)924-7272 East Northport Fire District $315,153.91 09/29/15 (631)261-1177, H2M architects+engineers (631)756-8000 " Bridgehampton Fire District $613,197.00 07/09/15 (631)537-1909; Dominic LaPierre Architect (631)533-7349 Selah Lester House,Town of East Hampton $327,113.00 05/29/14 �+ (631)324-4183; D.B.Bennett,P.E.,P.C. (631)907-0023 Storage Building,Suffolk County D.P.W. $335,639.00 11/06/13 (631)852-4230 Apparatus Bay Alterations,West Islip Fire District $415,736.62 1/30/13 (631)661-6440; Martin F.Sendlewski,AIA (631)727-5352 11 QS-2 • I. µ 5. Has your firm requested arbitration or filed any lawsuits_with regard to construction contracts within the last five years?If yes,please provide details. �a 6. List the major construction projects your organization has underway at this date: i Name of: Engineer/ Project Owner Architect Contract Percent Scheduled Name Telephone# Telephone# Amount Comte Completion I 7. List five major projects you organization has completed in the past five years: Name of Engineer/ Word Done Project Owner Architect Contract Date of With Own Forces Name Tele hone# Telephone# Amount Completion %of Work p.. 11 ' 1/ QS-2 It 8. List the constriction experience of the principal individuals of your organization (particularly the anticipated project supervisors): Present Type of Work Position Years of For Which In What Individual's Name Of Office Ex crience Responsible �aeity Donald' 011-AA lb-0 -Pyre I o(eAT �>9 yea.rs �,cperienr►csz i r *V4 ` Co-v\cA-f ) ck-;-Y-� ', v\duS y 4a 'Ol�Cin�en, ,cam 1�eS . - 31 Pc�vS ex P2r,eN csi ', r �1 �o 9. Do you have, or can you obtain,sufficient labor and equipment to commence work when required and complete the work within the Contract Time? Yes 10. Bank References: 0- 11. Trade Association Membership: u d e rs �► 5-�►�u ' ® 12. Has your firm ever been investigated by the New York State Department of Labor for prevailing wage rate violations?If yes,when?What was the outcome of the investigation? �J o O QS-3 O J O ' ,.1 13. Attach current state of financial conditions showing assets, liabilities and net worth. Failure to attach the required documentation may be considered non-responsive on the part of the Bidder and may result in rejection of the Bidder's Proposal. STATE OF eW o ) COUNTY OF S j,�.. k ) �oyicc. h S being duly sworn deposes and says that he is the jk re!�h &.e,n 7� of Ci e`eo c4 ='IL;0 r.contractor and that answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. (Signature of person who signed bid) 10v\Oukd 3'.01iAa.htoy), -�reridOVA- Sworn to before me this I A-` day of Wzd ,2W5- Notary 015Notary Public 64M e-,07n cz�,. /Vzv Commission ExpiratiDate; o g/i I'I g No, iI.97��7l7 ti QS-4 _ T 1 •1' L.K. MCLEANASSOCIATES, P.0 L11AA CONSULTING ENGINEERS 437 South Country Road, Brookhaven,N.Y. 11719 Phone(631) 286-8668 Fax(631) 286-6314 To: All Recipients From: Matthew Jedlicka Co: Pages: 8 (including coversheet) Fax: Date: November 6, 2015 Re: Town of Southold CC: Highway Maintenance Garage and Site Improvements Addendum No. 1 X Urgent ❑ For Review ❑Please Comment X Please Reply ❑Please Recycle • Comments Once you have received this please check the box and fax back-to (631)286-6314. Please include a copy of this form with your bid submission. Thank you for your cooperation. Ly I have received Addendum No. 1 regarding the Maintenance Building and Site Improvements. Company Name: r enc- M e.\evi cam.. C Authorized Signature: � Date: ,11 r a1d � d'k�a�l�, `fires J - ADDENDUM NO. 1 L The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda: Addendum No. Dated 1 11-6-2015 Signature of person, film or corporation making this Proposal: (Contractor) Q�4 --t)ba\ &S• O'NV\r\lor, (Title) P.O.Address: S• -bb* 927 l-18 1 - - Phone No.: 601- 7q4—o 01 Dated:- TT The full names and address of all persons interested in the Proposal or principals are as follows: Name Address lovidid J'. '' ox0 , 1 I-M E,.OI csLW6. 'P,o, 15ax 91cl7, SouYxcK fhea,,-h IJV 11-191 Co�rme� o'F�.►�19�� �.ctre��y '�7.O• l� q��, So��nd�ect,c�- tv� 117g�1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 -Page 5 of 5 CONTRACT AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT made this day of Two Thousand and Thirteen by and between the Town of Southold, party of the first part (hereinafter called the Owner); and , party of the second part (hereinafter called Contractor). WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the premises and the agreements herein contained, and the payments herein provided to be made, the parties hereto agree as follows: FIRST: The Contractor shall perform all labor, and furnish all the materials, equipment, tools, and implements and will well and faithfully perform and complete the entire work of constructing the Highway Maintenance Garage & Site Improvements AS DESCRIBED IN THE Contract Documents made and prepared by the Town of Southold, and L.K. McLean Associates P.C. , the project engineers, and as set forth in the Contractor's Bid dated , and in strict and entire conformity and in accordance with the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal Form (Bid), Performance Bond, Conditions of Contract, General Conditions, Detailed Specifications, Contract Drawings, Addenda, and this Agreement, hereto annexed and made a part hereof, and hereinafter collectively referred to as "Contract Documents". SECOND: In Consideration of the Contractor performing this Contract in the manner herein stated and as stated in the Contract Documents, the Owner promises and agrees to pay or cause to be paid to the Contractor the sums of money mentioned in said Contract Documents in the manner and under the conditions therein provided. THIRD: The Contractor covenants and agrees that, anything in this Contract or in the Contract Documents to be contrary notwithstanding, or regardless of any matter, thing, contingency of condition unforeseen or otherwise, present or future, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any additional or further sums of money than the amounts in said Contract Documents provided; and the failure of the Owner or its agents to insist upon strict performance of any of the terms, covenants, agreements, provisions or conditions in this Agreement or in the Contract Documents, on any one or more instances, shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment for the future of any such terms, covenants, agreements, provisions and conditions and the same shall be and remain in full force and effect with power and authority on the part of the Owner to enforce the same or cause the same to be enforced at any time, without prejudice to any other rights which the Owner may have against the Contactor under this Agreement or the Contract Documents. A-1 I Terms used in the Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. Neither Owner nor Contractor shall, without the prior written consent of the other, assign or sublet in whole or part his interest under any of the Contact Documents; and, specifically, Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due without the prior written consent of the Owner. Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of the other party hereto in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents constitute the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor and may only be altered, amended or repealed by a duly executed written instrument signed by both parties. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year first above written. Total Bid Dollars Written in Words Written in Figures TOWN OF SOUTHOLD CONTRACTOR BY BY Scott A.Russell, Supervisor TITLE BY Town Attorney (CORPORATE SEAL) "� A-2 ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF ) ss.: On the day of in the year 2014 before me, the undersigned, personally appeared, , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. NOTARY PUBLIC STATE OF NEW YORK, COUNTY OF )ss.: On the day of in the year 2014 before me, the undersigned, personally appeared, , personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the individual(s) whose name(s) is (are) subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument, the individual(s), or the person upon behalf of which the individual(s) acted, executed the instrument. NOTARY PUBLIC A-3 NEq.�� t k, Andrew M Cuomo,Governor 9, '"Q"I d Roberta Reardon,Commissioner SENT Town of Southold Schedule Year 2015 through 2016 Matt Jedlicka,Designer Date Requested 10/05/2015 LK McClean Associates, PC PRC# 2015010383 437 South Country Road Brookhaven NY 11719 Location Southold Hwy Yard Project ID# 13108 Project Type Construction of a new insulated post frame(pole barn)garage on a reinforced concrete foundation. Includes HVAC, plumbing and electrical work. PREVAILING NAGE SCHEDULE FOR ARTICLE 8 PUBLIC WORK PROJECT Attached is the current schedule(s) of the prevailing wage rates and prevailing hourly supplements for the project referenced above. A unique Prevailing Wage Case Number (PRC#) has been assigned to the schedule(s) for your project. The schedule is effective from July 2015 through June 2016. All updates, corrections, posted on the 1st business day of each month, and future copies of the annual determination are available on the Department's website www.labor.state.ny.us. Updated PDF copies of your schedule can be accessed by entering your assigned PRC#at the proper location on the website. It is the responsibility of the contracting agency or its agent to annex and make part, the attached schedule, to the specifications for this project, when it is advertised for bids and /or to forward said schedules to the successful bidder(s), immediately upon receipt, in order to insure the proper payment of wages. Please refer to the "General Provisions of Laws Covering Workers on Public Work Contracts" provided with this schedule, for the specific details relating to other responsibilities of the Department of Jurisdiction. Upon completion or cancellation of this project, enter the required information and mail OR fax this form to the office shown at the bottom of this notice, OR fill out the electronic version via the NYSDOL website. NOTICE OF COMPLETION / CANCELLATION OF PROJECT Date Completed: Date Cancelled: Name&Title of Representative: Phone: (518)457-5589 Fax: (518)485-1870 W.Averell Harriman State Office Campus, Bldg. 12, Room 130,Albany, NY 12240 www.labor.state.ny.us. PW 200 PWAsk@labor.state.ny.us e�tioF NEky�? .n, cr Andrew M.Cuomo,Governor �OY °"" _ a 4� Roberta Reardon,Commissioner NT C Town of Southold Schedule Year 2015 through 2016 Matt Jedlicka, Designer Date Requested 10/05/2015 LK McClean Associates, PC PRC# 2015010383 437 South Country Road Brookhaven NY 11719 Location Southold Hwy Yard Project ID# 13108 Project Type Construction of a new insulated post frame(pole barn)garage on a reinforced concrete foundation Includes HVAC, plumbing and electrical work. Notice of Contract Award New York State Labor Law, Article 8, Section 220.3a requires that certain information regarding the awarding of public work contracts, be furnished to the Commissioner of Labor. One "Notice of Contract Award" (PW 16, which may be photocopied), MUST be completed for EACH prime contractor on the above referenced project. Upon notifying the successful bidder(s) of this contract, enter the required information and mail OR fax this form to the office shown at the bottom of this notice, OR fill out the electronic version via the NYSDOL website. Contractor Information All information must be supplied Federal Employer Identification Number: Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Amount of Contract: $ Contract Type: [ ] (01)General Construction Approximate Starting Date: [ ] (02) HeatingNentilation [ ] (03)Electrical Approximate Completion Date: [ ] (04)Plumbing [ ] (05)Other : Phone: (518)457-5589 Fax: (518)485-1870 W.Averell Harriman State Office Campus, Bldg. 12, Room 130,Albany, NY 12240 www.labor.state.ny.us. PW 16 PWAsk@labor.state.ny.us DIVISION I - GENERATE REQUIREMENTS TOWN OF SOUTHOLD HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE GAVAGE & SITE IMPROVEMENTS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CON'T'EN'T'S—DIVISION NO. I—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Included in this Division are the following sections: 01010 General 01025 Measurement and Payment 01500 Construction Facilities &Temporary Controls 01501 Health& Safety Provisions DIVISION I -Page 1 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 - GENERAL SITE The site of the proposed general construction for the HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE GARAGE & SITE IMPROVEMENTS is located at 275 Peconic Lane, Peconic in the Town of Southold, Suffolk County,New York and more particularly shown on the Contract Drawings. SCOPE A. The work to be performed under this Contract shall include all labor, materials, equipment, services and incidentals required to perform the proposed construction as indicated in the Specifications, shown on the Contract Drawings and/or as approved by the Engineer. B. In general, the work shall include but not be limited to the following: ® Pavement removal, site preparation and excavation ® Pole Barn Construction ® Concrete Foundation and Interior Concrete Slab ® Grading and Drainage ® Concrete Curbs & Sidewalks ® Concrete Aprons and exterior slab Q Site Restoration ® Sanitary System Installation ® Electric Service Connection ® Data outlets and Cat 6 cabling ® Gas Service ® Water Service Connection ® Fiber optic installation and Ethernet connection C. Without restricting the generality of the foregoing and for the convenience of each Contractor, the items of work are specified under the Standard 16 Uniform Divisions of the Construction Specifications Institute as follows: 1 General Requirements 2 Site Work 3 Concrete 4 Masonry 5 Metals 6 Wood 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 8 Doors and Finish Hardware 9 Finishes 10 Specialties 11 Equipment DIVISION 1 -Page 2 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 12 Furnishings 13 Special Construction 14 Conveying Systems 15 Mechanical 16 Electrical D. The work covered under these Divisions shall be bid under four(4) separate Contracts: Contract A—General Construction Contract B—HVAC Contract C—Plumbing Contract D—Electrical E. Each Prime Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating their contractual construction schedules with each other. Each Prime Contractor shall submit a computer generated critical point method schedule indicating all items of work under their respective contracts and in accordance with each Prime Contractor's associated work. It shall be each Prime Contractor's responsibility to update the schedule as required to reflect changes in schedule of any or all Prime Contractors. SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall make or provide any shop drawings, cuts or samples which the Engineer may require for the approval of details and to show the construction as it will be installed. No shop drawing shall be issued or used until it has been approved by the Engineer or his representative. After approval, no changes or deviations shall be made without written notice being sent to the Engineer. The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications unless he has,in writing, called the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort in the Shop Drawing or schedule. The Contractor shall submit six(6) copies of each requested item to the Engineer for approval. SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMEN The Contractor shall give his constant personal attention to the work while it is in progress, and he shall place it in charge of a competent and reliable superintendent, who shall have authority to act for the Contractor, and who shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ labor and equipment which shall be sufficient to prosecute the work to full completion in the manner and time specified. All workmen must have sufficient skill and experience in such work to properly and satisfactorily perform it and operate the equipment involved. Any person employed by the Contractor whom the Engineer may deem incompetent or unfit to perform the work, shall be at once discharged and shall not be again employed. DIVISION 1 -Page 3 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INSPECTION All proposed work under this Contract shall be performed during and with Engineer's approval. The Contractor is advised to inspect carefully the full premises and consult with the Engineer regarding any items of construction or reconstruction that may be questionable. MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF TRAFFIC The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to interfere to the least extent practicable with the passage of vehicles, pedestrians and all other kinds of public traffic; and he must take every precaution against accidents happening to said vehicles, pedestrians and other traffic because of his operations. The Contractor shall enforce regulations and restrictions as may be necessary or required for the protection of fire, accidents, property damage and public nuisance. He shall provide and maintain such toilet facilities at or adjacent to the site as may be required. The Contractor shall erect and maintain such signs, channel and obstruction markers and barricades as may be required for the protection of traffic. The Contractor shall not deposit or store any equipment or materials within the Site Area except with written permission from the Engineer. MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the existence of structures of municipal and other public service corporations on or adjoining the site of the work and give reasonable opportunity to and cooperation with the owners of these utilities in the work of reconstructing or altering them. Such reconstruction and alteration shall be so conducted as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the Contractor. Any additional cost of various items of work because of these utilities shall be included in the price bid for these items. B. The Engineer shall direct the public utility corporations to shift or remove those utility structures that may be necessary to permit the Contractor to carry out the work in accordance with the Plans. The Contractor shall not remove or cause to be removed, any structure owned by a public utility corporation without the approval of the Engineer. C. The Contractor shall cooperate with the public utility corporation whose structures (aerial, surface or subsurface) are within the limits of or along the outside of the right-of- way, to make it possible for them to maintain uninterrupted service. The Contractor shall conduct his operations in such a way as to delay or interfere as little as practicable with the work of the utility corporation. GRADES,LINES,LEVELS AND SURVEYS A. The Owner's Engineer will establish one(1)bench mark and location of the work lines as reference points for the Contractor. B. The reference points shall be maintained by the Contractor. All other required lines, levels, grades, etc., shall be furnished by the Contractor from the reference points. DIVISION 1 -Page 4 of 23 DIVISION I -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS C. Re-establishment of the reference points by the Engineer for the Contractor shall be done at the Contractor's expense. D. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as shown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the aforementioned to the Engineer before commencing work. Commencement of work shall be corrected by the Contractor at his expense. LABOR,LAWS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All Contractors and Subcontractors employed upon the work shall and will be required to conform to the Labors Laws of the State of New York, the Occupation Safety and Health Act of the various acts amendatory and supplementary thereto; and to all other laws, ordinances and legal requirements applicable thereto. B. All labor shall be performed in the best and most workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their respective trades. The standards of the work required throughout shall be of such grade as will bring results of the first class only. QUALIFICATIONS All bidders must have been established in the type of construction of whichever Prime Contract they are submitting a bid for as specified in the Contract Documents for a period of at least five (5) years. On request, bidders must furnish a list of a minimum of five (5) projects of similar type construction that was built by them in the Nassau- Suffolk area. List must contain name, address and telephone number of client's engineer for which each project was undertaken by Contract. A minimum of five(5)of the projects must have been built for municipal clients. APPROVAL OF SUBCONTRACTORS A. No Subcontractors shall be employed on the work unless prior approval has been given by the Engineer. The Contract shall, within five (5) days after signing of the Contract, submit a list of proposed Subcontractors to the Engineer for approval. The list shall contain firm names, names of all principals and addresses and projects completed by each Subcontractor and names, addresses and telephone numbers of the particular project's Engineer for which the Subcontractor on the aforementioned project list must have been of similar nature. A minimum of five (5) projects for each proposed Subcontractor must be submitted. B. If for any reason a Subcontractor must be discharged from work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to discharge, stating the reasons, and shall provide the Engineer with the name and qualifications of the replacement Subcontractor for approval by the Engineer. This action is deemed necessary to maintain continuity of the work and to minimize project disruptions. All costs due to slowdown of the project for such reasons shall be bome by the Contractor. DIVISION 1 -Page 5 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Where reference is made in these Specifications to a society, the portion referred to shall be read into and shall be a part of this Contract and Specifications. Materials, methods and equipment shall conform to the latest A.S.T.M., A.W.P.A., A.S.A.,N.E.C., I.E.S., etc. specifications as may relate to or govern the construction work. CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contract drawings which accompany and form part of these Specifications, bear the general title HIGHWAY MAINTENANCE GARAGE AND SITE IMPROVEMENTS, Suffolk County,New York and separately numbered and entitled as follows: Tl TITLE SHEET CO LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES C1 OVERALL SITE PLAN C2 EXISTING CONDITIONS C3 SITE PLAN C4 SITE DETAILS C5 SANITARY PLAN C6 SANITARY DETAILS C7 DRUM STORAGE PLAN AND DETAILS C8 500 GAL WASTE OIL TANK DETAILS S1 FOUNDATION PLAN S2 FOUNDATION DETAILS S3 INTERIOR PARTITION FRAMING AO CODE COMPLIANCE Al FLOOR PLAN AND DETAILS A2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ELEVATIONS A3 ELEVATIONS A4 SECTIONS A5 ENLARGED PLAN AND DETAILS A6 DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULES AND DETAILS MO LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES M1 GROUND FLOOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN M2 ROOF /MEZZANINE CONSTRUCTION PLAN M3 DETAILS M4 DETAILS M5 SCHEDULES M6 SCHEDULES PO LEGEND, ABBREVIATIONS AND NOTES PI GROUND FLOOR DOMESTIC WATER CONSTRUCTION PLAN P2 UNDER SLAB SANITARY CONSTRUCTION PLAN P3 GROUND FLOOR SANITARY CONSTRUCTION PLAN P4 GROUND FLOOR/MEZZ. NATURAL GAS CONSTRUCTION PLAN DIVISION 1 -Page 6 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REO20REMENTS P5 SCHEDULES AND DETAILS P6 DETAILS EO ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET E1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN -POWER E2 FIRST FLOOR PLAN—LIGHTING E3 MEZZANINE PLAN—LTG &PWR E4 ELECTRICAL RISER AND DETAILS E5 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES E6 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES CLEAN-IJP The Contractor shall at all times keep the construction area, including storage areas used by him, free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish and prior to completion of the work, remove any rubbish from and about the premises. Upon completion of the construction, the Contractor shall leave the work premises in a clean, neat and workmanlike condition satisfactory to the Engineer. GUARANTEES A. Before issuance of the final certificate, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner the following guarantees in addition to those specifically required in the General Conditions and in the various technical sections. B. The Contractor hereby guarantees that all materials and workmanship installed under his respective contract to be new and of good quality in every respect and to remain so for a period of one (1) year or for longer periods where so provided for in the Specifications, from the date of issuance of the Final Certificate by the Engineer. C. Should any defects develop in the aforesaid work within the stipulated periods due to faults in materials and/or workmanship, the Contractor hereby agrees to make all repairs and do all necessary work to correct the defective parts. Such repairs and corrective work, including the cost of making good all other work damaged by or otherwise affected by making of the repairs or corrective work shall be done without any cost or expense to the owner, and at the entire cost and expense of the Contractor, within five(5) days after notice to the Contractor. The owner may have the work done and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor and/or his Sureties who agree to pay the owner the cost of such work if the Contractor fails to respond as required. PAYMENTS Payment(s) made under this Contract will be made on the basis of actual work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payments will be computed from the unit and lump sum bid. Payment will only be made for the items shown in the Proposal Form. END OF SECTION 01010 -GENERAL DIVISION 1 - Page 7 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01025—MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall furnish all labor,materials,tools, equipment, appurtenances and all services necessary to perform all Work as required by the plans and specifications or as required by the Engineer, at the lump sum or unit prices for the items listed herein. ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES The ENGINEER'S estimated quantities for unit price pay items are approximate only and are included solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids. The OWNER does not expressly or by implication agrees that the nature of the materials encountered below the surface of the ground or the actual quantities of material encountered or required will correspond with the estimated quantities. PAYMENT ITEMS (BY CONTRACT ITEM FROM THE PROPOSAL FORMS) CONTRACT A—GENERAL CONSTRUCTION Al—GENERAL CONDITIONS & SITE MOBILIZATION 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum payment which shall include, but not be limited to temporary utilities, on-going supervision and management, on-going project-related expenses, insurances, bonding, labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to mobilize to the construction site, any construction staging, re-mobilization if required, and meet all of the general requirements set forth under Division 1. This also includes, but is not limited to; project closeout activities, complying with all conditions set forth in the Conditions of Contract and General Conditions of the Contract, and demobilize from the construction site upon successful completion of the project. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) lump sum cost as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payments shall be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. 25% first partial payment b. 75%based upon percentage of completion of work 3. Intent: This bid item shall facilitate requirements of Division 01000 of the specification and construction operations. DIVISION 1 -Page 8 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A2 —SITE PREPARATION & REMOVALS 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum payment which shall include labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prepare the site including removal and disposal of existing pavements and all erosion and sediment control measures. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) lump sum cost as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Owner. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. All costs of site preparation, pavement removal and disposal, erosion and sediment control measures, labor, materials and other incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work in accordance with the plan, specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer shall be included in the price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall install, maintain and remove (after final acceptance) all sediment and erosion control methods and remove existing pavements and prepare the site needed for construction and as required and shown in the Contract Documents. A3—UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION& GRADING 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the Unclassified Excavation & Grading of the proposed work areas completed as shown on the`Contract Drawings. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. All costs of excavating, stockpiling, rehandling of piles, grading and compacting the subgrade (including field testing), labor, materials and other incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work in accordance with the plan, specifications, and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the lump sum price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The contractor shall excavate and grade the site as required by the work shown in the Contract Documents. A4—BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the proposed complete building construction (pole barn) installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. DIVISION 1 -Page 9 of 23 DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS All costs associated with engineering, layout, construction of the reinforced concrete foundation and complete building, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer shall be included in the price bid for this Item. Excavation is paid under a separate item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete building as shown on the Construction Drawings and in the Contract Documents. A5—8" TRICK REINFORCED EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the square foot unit price for the 8" Thick Reinforced Exterior Concrete Slab installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, measured in place and as approved by the Owner. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per square foot installed. All costs associated with stakeout, site preparation, formwork, concrete, reinforcement, testing of concrete cylinders (compressive strength two - 7 and two - 28 day breaks), grading, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the unit price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the 8" Thick Reinforced Exterior Concrete Slab as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described by these Technical Specifications. A6 —4" TRICK CONCRETE SIDEWALK 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the square foot unit price for the 4" Thick Concrete Sidewalk installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, measured in place and as approved by the Owner. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per square foot installed. All costs associated with stakeout, site preparation, formwork, concrete, reinforcement, testing of concrete cylinders (compressive strength two - 7 and two - 28 day breaks), grading, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the unit price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the 4" Thick Concrete Sidewalk as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described by these Technical Specifications. A7—CONCRETE CURB 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the linear foot unit price for the Concrete Curb installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, measured in place and as DIVISION 1 -Page 10 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL,REQUIREMENTS approved by the Owner. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per square foot installed. All costs associated with stakeout, site preparation, formwork, concrete, reinforcement, testing of concrete cylinders (compressive strength two - 7 and two - 23 day breaks), grading, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the unit price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the Concrete Curb as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described by these Technical Specifications. A8—SEPTIC SYSTEM 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the installation and SCDHS approval of the Septic System as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. All costs associated with stakeout, excavation, backfilling, castings, covers, septic tank, leaching rings, piping, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the unit price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the Septic System as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described by these Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate all SCDHS inspections and submit final as-built drawings and certifications required by the County and receive final approval from the SCDHS. A9—DRAINAGE SYSTEM 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the vertical foot price for the installation of the drainage system as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per vertical foot installed. All costs associated with stakeout, excavation, backfilling, castings, covers, drainage structures, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the unit price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the Drainage System as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described by these Technical Specifications. I I DIVISION 1 -Page 11 of 23 ]DIVISION 1 - GENERAL,REQUIREMENTS A10—8"ADS DRAINAGE PIPE 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the linear foot price for the complete installation of the 8" ADS Drainage Pipe as shown on the Contract Drawings and defined in these Technical Specifications. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per linear foot price for the complete installation of the 8" ADS Drainage Pipe. The linear foot cost for this item shall include all labor, pipe, trenching, backfilling, materials, equipment and incidentals associated with the installation of the 8" ADS Drainage Pipe as specified in the Contract drawings and Specifications, and/or as directed by the Owner. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the 8" ADS Drainage Pipe as shown on the Construction Drawings and described in these Technical Specifications. GENERAL CONS'T'RUCTION ALTERNATES Alt I —RESINOUS FLOORING 2. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the complete installation of the resinous flooring as defined in these Technical Specifications. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum for the complete installation of the Resinous Flooring. The cost for this item shall include all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals associated with the installation of the Resinous Flooring as specified in the Contract drawings and Specifications, and/or as directed by the Owner. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the Resinous Flooring over the entire concrete floor system as described in these Technical Specifications. DIVISION 1 -Page 12 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT B—HVAC B1 —GENERAL CONDITIONS & SITE MOBILIZATION 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum payment which shall include, but not be limited to, temporary utilities, on-going supervision and management, on-going project-related expenses, insurances, bonding, labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to mobilize to the construction site, any construction staging, re-mobilization if required, and meet all of the general requirements set forth under Division 1. This also includes, but is not limited to; project closeout activities, complying with all conditions set forth in the Conditions of Contract and General Conditions of the Contract, and demobilize from the construction site upon successful completion of the project. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) lump sum cost as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payments shall be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. 25% first partial payment b. 75%based upon percentage of completion of work 3. Intent: This bid item shall facilitate requirements of Division 01000 of the specification and construction operations. B2—BUILDING HEATING, COOLING AND VENTILATION SYSTEMS 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the proposed building heating, cooling and ventilation systems, including but not limited to vent, oil supply (tank and piping), compressed air (compressor and piping), etc., installed, tested, commissioned and accepted as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and described in this specification. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested, commissioned and accepted HVAC/Mechanical systems within the building. DIVISION 1 -Page 13 of 23 DIVISION I - GENERAL.REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT C—PLUMBING C1 —GENERAL, CONDITIONS & SITE MOBILIZATION 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum payment which shall include, but not be limited to, temporary utilities, on-going supei vision and management, on-going project-related expenses, insurances, bonding, labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to mobilize to the construction site, any construction staging, re-mobilization if required, and meet all of the general requirements set forth under Division 1. This also includes, but is not limited to; project closeout activities, complying with all conditions set forth in the Conditions of Contract and General Conditions of the Contract, and demobilize from the construction site upon successful completion of the project. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) lump sum cost as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payments shall be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. 25% first partial payment b. 75%based upon percentage of completion of work 3. Intent: This bid item shall facilitate requirements of Division 01000 of the specification and construction operations. C2—GAS SERVICE 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the proposed underground gas service installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, measured in place and as approved by the Owner. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum. All costs associated with stakeout, layout, site preparation, trenching, piping, valves, fittings, connections, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the lump sum price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested and accepted gas service as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described in these Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall perform all required coordination with National Grid. C3—WATER SERVICE 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the proposed water services installed as shown on the Contract Drawings, measured in place and as approved by the Owner. DIVISION 1 -Page 14 of 23 DIVISION I -GENERAL,REQUIREMENTS 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum. All costs associated with stakeout, layout, site preparation, trenching, piping, tapping main, valves, fittings, connections, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to satisfactorily complete the work according to the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Owner shall be included in the lump sum price bid for this Item. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested and accepted water service as shown on the Construction Drawings and as described in these Technical Specifications. C4—BUILDING PLUMBING-SYSTEMS 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the building plumbing systems (including but not limited to gas piping, compressed air, water and drainage) installed, tested and accepted as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and described in this specification. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested and accepted plumbing systems within the building. DIVISION 1 -Page 15 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACT D—ELECTRICAL DI —GENERAL CONDITIONS & SITE MOBILIZATION 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum payment which shall include, but not be limited to, temporary utilities, on-going supervision and management, on-going project-related expenses, insurances, bonding, labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to mobilize to the construction site, any construction staging, re-mobilization if required, and meet all of the general requirements set forth under Division 1. This also includes, but is not limited to project closeout activities, complying with all conditions set forth in the Conditions of Contract and General Conditions of the Contract, and demobilize from the construction site upon successful completion of the project. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) lump sum cost as specified, shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payments shall be made in accordance with the following schedule: a. 25% first partial payment b. 75%based upon percentage of completion of work 3. Intent: This bid item shall facilitate requirements of Division 01000 of the specification and construction operations. D2—UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC SERVICE 3. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the complete installation of the Underground Electric Service as shown on the Contract Drawings and defined in these Technical Specifications. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be lump sum for the complete installation of the Underground Electric Service. The cost for this item shall include all labor, conduits, trenching, backfilling, wiring, connection to existing electric panel in a separate location, site restoration, materials, equipment and incidentals associated with the installation of the Underground Electric Service as specified in the Contract drawings and Specifications, and/or as directed by the Owner. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install complete tested and accepted Underground Electric Service to the building as shown on the Construction Drawings and described in these Technical Specifications. This includes any inspections and Underwriters Certificates. DIVISION 1 -Page 16 of 23 DIVISION I - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS D3—FIBER OPTIC LINE 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the fiber optic line installed in conduit, terminated, tested and accepted as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and described in this specification. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested and accepted fiber optic connection between the existing building and new building. This includes required testing and termination. The Ethernet switches and connections at both terminations are by others. D4—BUILDING ELECTRICAL & COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the building electrical and communication (Cat 6 cable, Ethernet jacks and double Ethernet outlets) systems installed, tested, labeled and accepted as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. This price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and described in this specification. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested, labeled and accepted electrical and communication systems within the building. This includes the data systems. D5—BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1. Method of Measurement: The Contractor shall receive the lump sum price for the building fire alarm systems installed, tested and accepted as shown on the Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. 2. Method of Payment: Payment for this item shall be per lump sum installed in accordance with the approved schedule of values. Compensation under this work item DIVISION 1 -Page 17 of 23 DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall be made separately and based upon the completion of the work by percentage. This price shall constitute fall compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the work as shown on the contract drawings and described in this specification. 3. Intent: The Contractor shall provide and install the complete tested and accepted fire alarm systems within the building. END OF SECTION 01025—MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS DIVISION 1 -Page 18 of 23 DMI SION I - GENERAL,REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01500—CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SCOPE Work shall include but not be limited to the following: A. Temporary Utilities—Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service (including fax machine), water and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls — Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities — Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. TEMPORARY ELECTRICI'T'Y(By Electrical Contractor) The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for the temporary electric power for construction to an established point proximate to the construction area. The temporary service shall be installed within 30 days of the award of the contract. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary electric power to all trades, for the duration of the project. TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE (By General Contractor) A. The General Contractor shall provide temporary water service for construction purposes, sanitary facilities, fire protection and for cleaning. B. Potable water shall be furnished for construction personnel by portable containers. C. Water service shall be protected from freezing, and the service shall be extended and relocated as necessary to meet temporary water requirements. D. The Contractor shall install a meter and pay for all expenses associated with temporary water service during the course of the work, including furnishing all necessary permits and fees required for temporary water service. E. Comply with all applicable codes and arrange for all necessary inspections and approvals. F. Upon completion of all work, the Contractor shall disconnect and remove all temporary connections and fixtures. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES By General Contractor) A. The General Contractor shall provide at the site suitable enclosed toilet facilities for the DIVISION 1 -Page 19 of 23 i DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS use of construction personnel. The Contractor shall observe and enforce all sanitary regulations and maintain satisfactory sanitary conditions around and on all parts of the work. B. Adequate washing facility shall be provided for the construction personnel. C. The Contractor shall maintain, service, clean, and disinfect facilities in a satisfactory manner and enforce proper use of the sanitary facilities. D. The Contractor shall be subject to a fine and prosecution if any human excrement is deposited in or around the construction site. E. The Contractor shall pay for all expenses associated with temporary sanitary facilities during the course of the work, including furnishing all necessary permits and fees required for temporary sanitary facilities. F. Comply with all applicable codes and arrange for all necessary inspections and approvals. FIRST-AID FACILITIES AND ACCIDENTS A. The Contractor shall provide, at the site, such equipment and facilities as are necessary to supply first-aid to any of his personnel who may be injured in connection with the work. B. Accident 1. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer all accidents and whatsoever arising out of, or in connection with, the performance of the work, whether on or adjacent to the site, which cause death, personal injury or property damage, giving full details and statements of witness. 2. If death or serious injuries or serious damages are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or messenger to both the Owner and the Engineer. 3. If any claim is made by anyone against the Contractor or a Subcontractor on account of any accidents, the Contractor shall promptly report the facts in writing to the Engineer, giving full details of the claim. WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment. • B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect DIVISION 1 -Page 20 of 23 DMSIOIN I -GENERAL,REQUIREMENTS site from soil erosion. C. Provide temporary control of surface water, stormwater runoff and discharge from pumping in accordance with Contractor's approved soil erosion and sediment control plan. SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect work, and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner. C. Furnish security during the course of the work. ACCESS ROAD A. Maintain roads accessing construction area as shown on the Construction Drawings. B. Extend and relocate as work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstiuctions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public and private streets. Clean all mud and debris from construction traffic at no additional expense to the Owner. Comply with all State and Local regulations. E. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic, as directed by the Owner and Engineer. Damage to existing site roads as a result of this Contract will be the responsibility of the Contractor. PARKING A. The Contractor's personnel shall not park on the main road or adjacent private side streets. B. When space is not adequate,provide additional off-site parking. C. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. DIVISION 1 -Page 21 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS B. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and dispose weeldy in areas as designated by the Owner. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES,FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Applications for Payment Inspections. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified conditions. END OF SECTION 01500—CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS DIVISION 1 -Page 22 of 23 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01501—HEALTH AND SAFETY PROVISIONS REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain a safe workplace and to monitor working conditions at all times during construction and, as necessary, to provide appropriate protective clothing, equipment and facilities for his personnel, and/or to establish work place procedures to ensure their safety, and to enforce the use of these procedures, equipment and/or facilities in accordance wit the following guidelines: 1. Safety and Health Regulations Promulgated by the U.S. Department of Labor OSHA, 29 CFR 1910 — Occupational Safety and Health Standards, and 29 CFR 1920—Safety and Health Regulations for Construction. 2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Medical Monitoring Program Guidelines. B. If, at any time, the Owner or the Engineer is apprised of a safety hazard which demands immediate attention because of its high potential for harm to public travel, persons on or about the work, or public or private property, the owner of the Engineer shall have the right to order such safeguards to be erected and such precautions to be taken as necessary and the Contractor shall comply with such orders. If, under such circumstances, the Contractor does not or cannot or his representative is not upon the site so that he can be notified immediately of the insufficiency of safety precautions, the Owner may put the work into such a condition that it shall be, in his opinion, in all respects safety, and the Contractor shall pay all expenses of such labor and materials as may have been used for this purpose by him or by the Owner. The fact that the Owner or the Engineer does not observe a safety hazard or does not order the Contractor to take remedial measures shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the entire responsibility for any costs or claims for loss, damage, or injury by or against any part sustained on account of the insufficiency of the safety precautions taken by him or by the Owner acting under authority of this Section. C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to take appropriate safety precautions to meet whatever conditions of hazard may be present during the performance of the work, whether reasonably foreseeable or not. The Contractor is alerted to the fact that it shall be his sole responsibility to anticipate and provide such additional safety precautions, facilities, personnel and equipment as shall be necessary to protect life and property from whatsoever conditions of hazard are present or may be present. END OF SECTION 01501—HEALTH AND SAFETY PROVISIONS DIVISION 1 -Page 23 of 23 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under the Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO.2- SITE WORD Included in this Division are the following sections: 02200 Site Preparation 02320 Unclassified Excavation&Grading 02512 PVC Water Pipe and Fittings 02513 Copper Tubing and Fittings (Underground) 02525 Water Piping Completion 02540 Septic Systems 02623 Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 02630 Storm Drainage 02772 Concrete Curb 02775 Concrete Walks DIVISION 2—Page 1 of 20 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK SECTION 02200 -SITE PREPARATION WORD INCLUDED The Contractor shall furnish labor, materials, equipment and appurtenances necessary or required to perform and complete all work including,but not limited to the following: A. Location and Stakeout B. Clearing, removing and the legal disposal of all debris and miscellaneous structures not covered under other sections of these Specifications. C. The Contractor shall do all stakeout, layout, and elevations necessary to perform the intended construction. Surveying shall be performed by a Licensed Land Surveyor acceptable to the Engineer. All instruments, equipment, stakes and any other material necessary to perform this work satisfactorily shall be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Location and stakeout work shall be performed by a Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor duly licensed in the State of New York. B. The Contractor shall, at their own expense, secure and pay for all permits, inspections, fees and give all legal notices that may be required in connection with the work, including the notification of owners of existing subsurface gas and other utility lines. INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall visit and thoroughly familiarize themselves with the site and with the scope of work to be done. B. When the Contractor submits their proposal, it shall be interpreted to mean that he has examined the site, fully understands the existing and proposed conditions and has made due allowances for them in their proposal. PREPARATION A. Notification of utility companies shall be in accordance with Industrial Code Rule#53 of Title 12, of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York. B. Notify all utility companies, prior to start of work and ascertain location of all existing utilities. C. Exercise extreme caution in the area of existing utilities so as not to cause damage or DIVISION 2—Page 2 of 20 DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK breakage. D. The Contractor shall verify all elevations and satisfy themselves as to their correctness by visiting the site of the proposed work and examining the actual condition prior to the beginning of the work. PERFORMANCE A. The Contractor shall exercise diligent care to protect existing trees, shrubs and under- growth not to be removed and shall replace at his own expense any such existing plants, trees, shrubs or other plant material removed, destroyed, disfigured or damaged because of his negligence with similar planting approved by the Engineer. B. All wood and brush shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor at their own expense. ADJUST AND CLEAN The Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all rubbish and surplus material as fast as it accumulates and shall not permit it to be scattered about the project site. END OF SECTION 02200-SITE PREPARATION DIVISION 2—Page 3 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WOR SECTION 02320 - UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION AND GRADING CLASSIFICATION Classification of excavation: Excavation shall be unclassified, and the term "unclassified excavation" shall be understood to mean any and all materials encountered during excavation work including structures, pavement, trees and stumps, foundations, retaining walls, earth, piping, demolition, drainage systems, etc. GENERAL SITE EXCAVATION A. The Contractor shall cut to exact elevations, grade and transport excavated materials to fill areas of the site if the material conforms to the specifications and/or as approved by the engineer. Material, which is unacceptable to the Engineer, shall be disposed of at the Contractor's expense. B. Unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with sand or gravel and shall be thoroughly compacted. C. Adequate provision shall be made to intercept or divert all surface water from the areas of construction operations and designated wetlands. D. The Contractor shall establish a construction grid for the areas of proposed excavation a grading to establish all stakeout, layout, and elevations necessary to perform the intended construction. Surveying shall be performed by a Licensed Land Surveyor acceptable to the Engineer. All instruments, equipment, stakes and any other material necessary to perform this work satisfactorily shall be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES: A. Depth: As indicated B. Clearance: Sufficient for formwork or other work to be performed. C. Embankments and Berms: Excavate to angle of recline or provide sheeting, shoring and bracing required for containing earth bank. D. Excess Depth: Carry footing and foundation walls to undisturbed soil. E. Loose Material and Debris: Keep out of excavation so footings will rest on solid,undisturbed soil. F. Protect against frost until concrete is poured. G. Soil Bearing Capacity: Do not proceed with pouring footings until nature of soil under footings has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. DIVISION 2—Page 4 of 20 DIVVISION 2-SITE WORK EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT Trench excavation to depths and widths as indicated on the contract drawings and or as directed by the engineer. END OF SECTION 02320 - UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION AND GRADING DIVISION 2—Page 5 of 20 DIVISION 2- SITE WORD SECTION 02512-PVC WATER PIKE AND FITTINGS DESCRIPTION Furnish and installation of all specified plastic water pipe and fittings required for approved installation of the potable and fire line distribution systems as indicated on the Contract Drawings SUBMITTALS Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications with detailed information regarding dimensions, pressure rating, fittings and installation instructions. Manufacturer's data must indicate compliance with the standards specified herein. MATERIALS A. PVC Main—The PVC water piping shall be Blue Brut6rm AWWA C900 PVC pressure pipe as manufactured by IFEX, Inc., www.ipexinc.com or approved equal. All PVC pipe shall bear the approval seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) that will remain legible during normal handling, storage, and installation. PIPE COLOR SHALL BE BLUE FOR POTABLE WATER MAINS. B. PVC Molded Fittings — The molded water main fittings shall be Blue Brut6rm AWWA C907 injection molded fittings as manufactured by IPEX, Inc., www.ipexinc.com or approved equal. All PVC pipe fittings shall bear the approval seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for potable water pipe. C. VALVES- All valves shall be the manufacturer's standard design for the service intended and shall bear the maker's name and pressure rating cast on the body, also the valve type, size, flow direction arrow, if applicable. Valves shall open left (counter clockwise) with an arrow cast in the metal of operating hand wheels or nuts indicating the direction of opening. D. Gate Valves- Underground gate valves shall be of the resilient seat type meeting the requirements of AWWA C500/C509. These valves shall have non-rising stems, shall be furnished with 2-inch square AWWA operating nuts, and shall open when the nut is turned counterclockwise. Valves shall have mechanical joint ends and shall be furnished complete with joint accessories. Exposed or aboveground gate valves shall be outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) flanged joint type. Valves shall be Ken-Seal as manufactured by Kennedy; Metroseal by U.S. Pipe; or approved equal. See Exhibit W-7. E. Tapping Valves- Tapping valves shall be mechanical joint outlet, non-rising, stem, resilient seat gate valves meeting the applicable requirements of AWWA C509. Tapping valves shall be specifically designed for pressure tapping with sufficient seat opening to allow full diameter taps to be made. Tapping valves shall be manufactured with an integral tapping flange having a raised lip design. DIVISION 2—Page 6 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORK F. Tapping Sleeves- Tapping sleeves for size-on-size connections shall be mechanical joint split cast iron units and rated for 150 psi working pressure in accordance with AWWA C110. For less than size-on-size connections, tapping sleeves shall be fabricated steel units with a fusion-bonded epoxy coating and shall be pressure rated as above. The contractor shall determine the outside diameter of the existing main before ordering the sleeve. Tapping sleeves shall have an outlet flange per ANSI B16.1, 125 lb. standard. G. Service Saddles- Service saddles shall have a ductile iron body, be equipped with double tie straps, and be suitable for either wet or dry installation. The sealing gasket shall be the O-ring type suitable for the applicable service. Outlet flange shall be ANSI B16.1, 125 lbs. standard. Tie straps and bolts shall be a corrosion resistant alloy steel. Service saddles shall be Type 313 or 323 as manufactured by Rockwell, or approved equal. H. Valve Box- Valve boxes for all valves installed below ground shall be cast iron. They shall be adjustable to fit the depth of earth cover over the valve and shall be designed so as to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping. Valve boxes shall have a minimum interior diameter of 5 inches. Valve box extension shall be installed to reserve a minimum of 50% of the adjustment for a future extension. The operating nut should not exceed 36 inches below finished grade. However, if conditions require that the operating nut exceeds 36 inches, then an extension, mechanically attached to the valve, shall be added, and the top of the extension shall not exceed 18 inches below finished grade. The cover of the valve box shall be marked "Water" and shall be securely installed as to prevent tipping or rattling. INSTALLATION A. Install pipe as indicated on the Drawings. B. Pipe in Trenches: 1. Keep trenches free from water. 2. Grade and shape trench bottom to insure a firm uniform bearing for the entire trench length. Provide a minimum cover of 4'-6" to finished grade unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 3. Cut pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Lay pipe on a continuously rising grade from low points to high points at service lines, air release valves or hydrants. 5. At each joint, dig a bell hole sufficiently wide and deep to allow the pipe barrel to bear uniformly on the trench bottom. 6. Construct concrete thrust blocks behind bends, tees, caps and plugs. Minimum block size shall be 2 cubic feet in volume and cast concrete against undisturbed n earth. C. Contractor shall install a wire with the piping prior to final backfill. The wire shall maintain continuity between all portions of the water distribution system for future tone out and locating. DIVISION 2—Page 7 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORK PROTECTING PIPE A. During the progress of the Work keep pipe clean from all sediment, debris, and other foreign material. B. Close all open ends of pipes and fittings securely with removable plugs at end of Work day, during storms, when the Work is left at any time, and at such times as the Director's Representative may direct. C. All water piping shall have a suitable electronic locator tape (metallic) buried over the water main approximately one foot below grade. The tape shall be continuous between valves and secured to each valve. The tape shall be at least 4.5 mils thick, 2-inch minimum width and made with an aluminum material sandwiched between 2 layers of polyethylene. It shall have imprinted in permanent black ink with 1- inch letters "CAUTION WATER MAIN BURIED BELOW" on blue background. END OF SECTION 02512-PVC WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS DIVISION 2—Page 8 of 20 .DIVISION 2-SITE WORK SECTION 02513 - COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS (UNDERGROUND) GENERAL, Furnish and installation of all specified copper water tubing and fittings required for approved installation of the water distribution system as indicated on the Contract Drawings MATERIAL A. Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K soft temper unless otherwise noted on the drawings. B. Fittings: Cast Bronze, Flared Type; ANSI/ASME B16.26. INSTALLATION A. Laying Tubing: 1. Minimum Depth: 4'-6" measured from finish or existing grade, whichever is lower. 2. Install valves and fittings where indicated. Lay tubing on a continuous slope to a high point where air can be released. B. Flaring and Assembling Tubing: 1. Cut tube ends square. 2. Remove all burrs and metal chips. 3. Slip coupling nut on tubing. 4. Flare tubing ends, use impact or mechanical type flaring tools in accordance with manufacturers'recommendations. 5. Assemble tubing fittings and tighten coupling nuts with two wrenches, one on the nut and one on the fitting. C. Protecting Tubing: Securely close all open ends of tubing and fittings with removable plugs. D. Testing-, 1. Before the tubing, valves or other appurtenances are covered, test to 150 pounds hydrostatic pressure. Protect tubing from movement during test. 2. Remove all defective tubing, valves, and fittings. Replace with sound items and make all leaky joints tight. Repeat the test after the repairs are made until no leaks develop when the line is subjected to the required pressure for a period of 30 minutes. 3. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer. ENI) OF SECTION 02513 - COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS (UNDERGROUND) DIVISION 2—Page 9 of 20 DIVISION 2- SITE WORD SECTION 02525—WATER PIPING COMPLETION CLEANING AND ADJUSTING As directed, the Contractor shall finally and thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment,piping, and other exposed work. Cleaning work shall be done in stages if so ordered to facilitate the work of others. All traps, wastes and supplies shall be shown to be free and unobstructed. All valves, faucets and automatic control devices shall be carefully adjusted for proper and quiet operation. GUARANTEE The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work, all materials and equipment furnished and installed and shall replace any work or equipment without charge which may become, as a result of defective work or materials, or which may be damaged during the correction of defective work. TESTS A. The Contractor shall perform and pass all required tests prior to acceptance of the work. These tests shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Hydrostatic Pressure Test shall be performed on all piping at a minimum pressure of 100 psi. 2. Hydrostatic Pressure Test on all waste water drainage and soil piping when systems are filled to overflowing. Provide temporary test plugs as required. B. The entire plumbing system shall be subject to function under normal design operating conditions and shall be leak free and capable of withstanding actual water pressures prior to final acceptance of the work. Final payment shall not constitute release or remove obligations from the Contractor to provide an acceptable operating system. STERILIZATION All potable water lines shall be sterilized in accordance with the SCDHS and SCWA prior to acceptance. FINAL CLOSEOUT The Contractor shall provide operations and maintenance manuals for all materials, equipment and systems installed and instruct the Owner's designated personnel on their use. END OF SECTION 02525—NATER PIPING COMPLETION DIVISION 2—Page 10 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORD SECTION 02540-SEPTIC SYSTEMS WORD INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install a complete sanitary system including all extension and connection work as specified herein, indicated on the contract drawings and/or directed by the engineer. B. The entire installation shall be performed in accordance with the standards and requirements of the Suffolk County Department of Health Services (S.C.D.H.S.) and all necessary installation approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor prior to final acceptance. SEWAGE DISPOSAL SYSTEMS A. Sewage disposal systems shall be installed as indicated on the contract drawings and shall meet the requirements of the S.C.D.H.S. Sewage disposal systems shall be connected to the waste lines to be installed by the Plumbing Contractor. The waste line shall extend approximately 5'-0" out from the foundation line and be cast iron or PVC pipe. B. Materials for the sewage disposal system not specifically specified under this section shall conform to the material specifications in other sections of the specifications as indicated on the contract drawings. C. Pre-cast concrete items shall be as manufactured by Carlson Precast Inc., Picone Brothers, Long Island Precast, or approved equal, and shall be designed to meet the standard specifications of the S.C.D.H.S. D. Septic tank shall be as indicated on the contract drawings, complete with precast concrete pad, pre-cast concrete sections, wall, cast iron manholes, frames and covers set flush with finished grade. E. Each sanitary leaching pool shall be installed as indicated on the contract drawings. F. Suitable backfill material shall conform to the specifications of the SCDHS. PIPING AND FITTINGS All piping and connections shall be Schedule 80 PVC. INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. The sewage disposal system shall be installed by a licensed sewage disposal system installer. B. During the progress of the work and prior to completion, the installation shall be inspected by the proper authorities,tested and left in perfect condition,neat and orderly. DIVISION 2—Page 11 of 20 DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK C. Before backfilling, the Contractor shall obtain the required approvals from the S.C.D.H.S. and notify the Engineer upon receipt of the approval. D. The Contractor shall be required to excavate to acceptable leaching soils as determined by the S.C.D.H.S. In the event that a sufficient quantity of suitable leaching material is not available from the excavation operation, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to import Clean Granular Fill. E. The Contractor shall provide the Certification from the licensed sewage disposal system installer. F. The Contractor shall provide an as-built plan with offset dimensions which correspond with the SCDHS Inspector's field measurements. END OF SECTION 02540 - SEPTIC SYSTEMS DIVISION 2—Page 12 of 20 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK SECTION 02623 -POLE'-VINYL CIILOIIIDE (PVC) PIPE DESCRIPTION Under this item the Contractor shall furnish and install Schedule 80 PVC pipe in conformance with the plans,these specifications and orders of the Engineer. MATER AI, PVC pipe and fittings shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) manufactured from a PVC compound meeting the requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC in accordance with ASTM D1784, D1785, and D2241. The PVC pipe shall be gray, or white in color and shall be equal to Schedule 80 in wall thickness,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. A. Pipe: The pipe shall be bell end or plain end. Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM D1785. B. Fittings: Pipe fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D2466. C. Solvent Cement: PVC solvent cement shall be in accordance with ASTM D2564. Pipe shall be clearly marked with type, class and thickness as applicable. Lettering shall be legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage. All pipe and duct 0 placed shall be in good condition with no splits, cracks or other physical irregularities. Pipe and duct size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. ROUTING The routing of conduit as shown on the plans is schematic but no major change in alignment will be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. In all cases where obstructions are met, the judgment of the Engineer shall govern the passage of such obstacles. INSTALLATION Plastic pipe shall be shaded from sunlight as required to prevent curvature and deterioration due to thermal expansion and exposure to sunlight. Pipe shall be placed in the center of the bottom of the trench with the entire length of the pipe bearing on the trench bottom. The trench bottom shall be regraded if the pipe does not have full bearing. Depressions for joints shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded, and shall be only of the length, depth and width required for marking the particular type joint. After final placement, pipe shall rest on the bottom of the trench in a straight line under slight tension. A check shall be made that proper depth is obtained and the pipe is in a straight line and under tension during backfilling. DIVISION 2—Page 13 of 20 DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK In cases where the pipe or ducts pass above or below an underground obstruction, such as a utility line, a minimum clearance of 6-inches shall be maintained between the concrete and the utility. A minimum of 12-inches of clearance shall be maintained between the concrete encasement and a paralleling utility. No utility shall be contained within the concrete encasement. Pipe jointing shall be completed as the pipe is installed. All joints shall be made secure and capable of allowing compressed air to be used for installing a pull line. Field pipe bends shall have a maximum bend of 22 degrees unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Where a bend is less than the allowable field bend is indicated on the drawings, factory bends shall be used unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Where directional changes are required, the pipe shall be bent in smooth, uniform bends. The - Contractor shall provide equipment to bend pipe when the radius of bends is less than the radius of allowable material design stress. Bends shall be made with approved pipe bending tools and pipe manufacturer's approved methods of procedure. J ENI) OF SECTION 02623-POLE'-VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE DIVISION 2—Page 14 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORD SECTION 02630—STORM DRAINAGE WORD INCLUDED The work shall include furnishing all labor, material, equipment, and incidentals necessary to install pre-cast concrete drainage structures, pipes, slabs, frames and grates, frames and covers, suitable granular porous leaching material (soil), and all other necessary operations to construct fully functioning stormwater drainage system in accordance with the plans, specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer. SHOP DRAWINGS Submit complete and accurate shop drawings, catalog cuts, details for the Engineer's approval. No installation shall be made prior to approval of the Engineer. MATERIALS A. El�Basins—L aeM 1basins shall cnsrst vf leaehing fings, footing r-ingi !� eateh basin, footing ring and tfaffie beafing slab shall be as manufaetffed by Long island Pr-eeast > Brookhaven, > lk •> Galveften, > Geastal Pipeline Corp, B. Leaching Pools — Leaching pools shall consist of leaching rings, footing ring, and a traffic bearing top slab with circular opening as indicated on the plan. The diameter and depth of the leaching pools shall be as indicated on the plans. The leaching rings, footing ring and traffic bearing slab shall be as manufactured by Long Island Precast, Brookhaven, NY; Suffolk Precast Inc., Calverton, NY; Coastal Pipeline Corp, Calverton, NY or an approved equal. G. hget Straetufe Gufb inlet stmnaetffes shall eonsist of pr-eeast eaner-ete floor- and wall stpaetffe and a tr-affie bearing tep sla with r-ee4anplar- opening as indieated an the plan. The eur-b inlet stT-uetafe and traffie beafing slab shall be as manufaetffed by Long is! > , equal.CaWeFten,NY or an approved --angular- etffb-eastings) The ft-affie and grate shall be heaNT duty type fame and hea,,-y duty bieyele friendly grate as manufaetufed by Campbell Feundr-y E. Ffames and Gfates (r-eetangular-area eastings) The ffame and grate shall be heavy duty4ype fame and heavy duty bieyele friendly grate as manufaettff ed by Campbell Fetin—d—y-Gempafty or- an appr-eved equal. Rafnes shall meeive twe (2) eeats of aspha4tie Paint prior- to installation and shall eanform te Stiff-elk County standards. DIVISION 2—Page 15 of 20 DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK F. Frames and Covers (circular solid cover) — The frame and solid cover shall be heavy-duty type frame and cover as manufactured by Campbell Foundry Company or an approved equal. Frames shall receive two (2) coats of asphaltic paint prior to installation. CampbellG. Frames and Gfates (eir-eular-grate) The fi�ame and grate shall be heavy duty Vfpe-fta�� grate as manufaetufed by 1~ a GeffTany or an approved ,1 Frames shall i vvvi v v two (2) vvuw of u . H. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe smooth interior) — The corrugated polyethylene pipe (smooth interior) shall be in accordance with Section 026424. H. Roof Drain Connections —Roof leaders shall be connected to subsurface drainage system with cast iron pipe with a cast iron cleanout "T" branch with Brass or Bronze threaded plug. Supply and install transition piece. 1. Afea Dr-ains 12" square eateh basin with univer-sal outlet and br-onze gfates by NDS a apir-eved-equah INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall excavate for the installation of the structures and pipes at the locations and to the limits as shown on the contract drawings. B. The outside area of the drainage structures shall be backfilled with clean granular porous material as specified. C. Pipes are to be installed to the lines and grades as indicated on the plans. D. Pipes may be backfilled with suitable excavated material and thoroughly compacted. The Engineer reserves the right to reject backfill material if in his opinion contains deleterious material. The Engineer shall determine if the compaction effort is sufficient to complete the installation. E. Frames and grates/covers shall be installed to the grades as indicated on the plans. A. Frames and grates/covers shall be well mortared in place. PROTECTION AND CLEANING The Contractor shall protect newly installed drainage structures from silt and debris during construction. Standard NYS Erosion and Sediment Control techniques shall be used to control the structures. All protection shall remain in-place until construction is complete and vegetation is established. Structure which contain silt or debris at final inspection shall be cleaned at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 02630—STORM DRAINAGE DIVISION 2—Page 16 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORK SECTION 02772—CONCRETE CURB J WORT{INCLUDED A. Under this Item, the Contractor shall construct a conventionally fonned concrete curb in accordance with the Details, Specifications and/or as directed by the Engineer. B. The construction of the concrete curbs shall meet the requirements of the New York State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications of January 2, 2002, as amended for Section 609 Conventionally Formed or Machine Formed Concrete Curb except as herein modified. MATERIALS A. The materials shall meet the requirements of the following subsections of Section 700 - Material: Portland Cement 701-01 Fine Aggregates 703-01 Coarse Aggregates 703-02 Premolded Resilient Joint Filler 705-07 Wire Fabric For Concrete Reinforcement 709-02 Polyethylene Curing Covers 711-04 Water 712-01 B. The material requirements and composition shall comply with the Specifications for Class "A" concrete in Section 501 - Portland Cement Concrete - General. Concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with the aggregate weights specified for Class "A" concrete in Table 501-3, Concrete Mixtures. C. The concrete cement shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS - A. The curb shall be conventionally formed to the size and shape shown on the Details or as directed by the Engineer. B. Curbs shall not be poured monolithically with the sidewalk unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. C. Casting Segments - Curb shall be cast in segments having a uniform length of approximately 20 feet. Segments shall be separated by contraction scoring. Contraction scoring shall be 1/4"wide x V deep - "V" shaped. D. Expansion Joints - Expansion joints 3/4 inch in width shall be formed with "Premolded Resilient Joint Filler", Section 705-07 placed at twenty (20) foot intervals as shown on the DIVISION 2—Page 17 of 20 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK Plans and specified by the Engineer. The filler material shall be cut 1/4" below top of the curb. E. Forms - Forms shall be steel or wood, straight, free from warp, and of such construction that there will be no interference to inspection for grade or alignment. All forms shall extend for the full curb depth and shall be braced and secured adequately so that no displacement from alignment will occur during placing of concrete. F. Handling and Placing Concrete - Concrete shall be placed in the forms in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 555-3.04 and shall be compacted with an approved, immersion type mechanical vibrator. The vibrator shall be of the size and weight capable of thoroughly vibrating the entire mass without damaging or misaligning the forms and shall be approved by the Engineer. Forms shall be left in place for 24-hours or until the concrete has sufficiently hardened, as determined by the Engineer, so that they can be removed without injury to the curb. Upon removal of the forms, the exposed faces of the curb shall be immediately rubbed to a uniform surface. Rubbing shall be accomplished by competent finishers. No plastering will be permitted. G. Concrete Curing - Curing of the curb shall comply with the requirements of Section 502- 3.11, Curing. Minimum curing periods for the various types of curing materials used shall comply with the requirements of Table 502-3. H. Protection - The Contractor shall keep the curb clean, aligned and protected from damage until final acceptance of the work. Any curb damaged prior to the final acceptance of the work shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02772— CONCRETE CURB DIVISION 2—Page 18 of 20 DIVISION 2-SITE WORD i SECTION 02775—CONCRETE WALKS WORD INCLUDED A. This work includes all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct concrete walks to the depth, limits and grades in accordance with the plans, specifications, and/or as directed by the Engineer. B. The construction of the concrete sidewalk shall meet the requirements of the New York State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications of January 2, 2002 as amended for Item 608 Sidewalks,Driveways and Bicycle Paths except as modified herein. MATERLA LS A. Materials shall meet the requirements specified in the following subsections of Section 700 - Materials: Portland Cement(Type II) Section 701-01 Fine Aggregates Section 703-01 Coarse Aggregates Section 703-02 Premolded Resilient Joint Filler Section 705-07 Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement Section 709-02 Polyethylene Curbing Covers Section 711-04 Water Section 712-01 B. The material requirements and composition shall comply with the Specifications for Class "A" concrete in Section 501 - Portland Cement Concrete - General. Concrete shall be proportioned in accordance with the aggregate weights specified for Class "A" concrete in Table 501-3, Concrete Mixtures. C. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. CONSTRUCTION DETAILS A. The general construction details for manufacturing, transporting, and placing concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 501, Portland Cement Concrete - General. Curing of concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 502, Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. B. Handicapped sidewalk ramps shall be constructed at locations determined by the Engineer. C. The concrete shall be placed in one course six inches (6")in depth. D. Wire fabric for concrete reinforcement, Section 709-02, shall be embedded at mid-depth in the slab. E. The wire fabric shall consist of No. 6 gauge wire at 6" centers traversely and longitudinally. DIVISION 2—Page 19 of 20 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK F. Transverse construction joints shall extend to the full depth of the slab and spaced 20 to 25 feet apart. The edges of such joints shall be finished with an edging tool having a.1/4-inch radius. G. The concrete surface shall be scored as approved by the Engineer so that the finished walk will be marked in squares. The concrete shall be worked and floated to produce a smooth and uniform surface. H. Premolded resilient joint filler, Section 705-07 shall be installed at all joints between sidewalk and curb,pavement, building, etc. I. After the completion of sidewalk work, the contractor shall cover the sidewalk overnight during the first night of curing with a polyethylene cover or an equal to the approval of the Engineer. No sidewalk shall be left uncovered overnight during the first night of curing. J. The contractor at all times provides access to homes and businesses in a manner approved by the Engineer. K. New sidewalk area shall be barricaded using ropes, horses, flagging, etc., in a manner approved by the Engineer to protect the public during the curing period until the sidewalk is sufficiently cured to allow pedestrian traffic. L. The Contractor shall protect the sidewalk and keep it in first class condition until the completion of the contract. Any portion of the sidewalk, which is damaged or vandalized at any time before the final acceptance of the work, shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory sidewalk at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02775—CONCRETE WALKS DIVISION 2—Page 20 of 20 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO.3 - CONCRETE Included in this Division are the following sections: 03100 Concrete Form Work 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 3 —Page 1 of 8 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE SECTION 03100- CONCRETE FORM WORK SCOPE A. The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all concrete form work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Forms and centering. 2. All forms required for the work in this Section. 3. Setting and building of all anchors, inserts, hangers, supports, ties, frames, bolts, sockets, sleeves, lintels, etc., required to be built into concrete work, except where otherwise specified. FORMS, CENTERING AND FORM WORD AFFECTING WORKMANSHIP A. Forms shall conform with the lines, dimensions and shapes of concrete indicated on the Drawings, for the members for which they are provided. They shall be tight to prevent any possibility of movement after concrete is poured and shall insure safety to workmen and the 0 public. B. On concrete exposed to view, metal ties where used shall be detached 1-inch back from surface of exposed side and holes filled with cement mortar and rubbed inunediately after removal of forms. q C. Forms for concrete work shall be plywood or composite of smooth line construction, that will produce straight, dense surface free from honeycombs,bulges and depressions. D. If any material is used to coat formwork to facilitate its removal, this material shall be of such nature as not to stain or injure the concrete or cause injury to finish to be applied on exposed surfaces on concrete. Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before reusing. E. All wood form work, including that used in void spaces, pockets and other similar places, shall be removed. F. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling concrete surface. WORK IN CONNECTION WITH OTHER SECTIONS AND/OR CONTRACTS A. Box out for pipes as directed and fill up to pipe sleeves with concrete after same are in place. B. Build in anchors,inserts or slots as required for proper anchorage. DIVISION 3 —Page 2 of 8 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE C. Set in concrete all sleeves furnished under other sections or contracts, in proper alignment and location. D. Cooperate with other trades. E. Build in concrete all forms furnished by other trades and required to be built into concrete. END OF SECTION 03100- CONCRETE FORM WORK DIVISION 3 —Page 3 of 8 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SEC'T'ION 03200- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SCOPE The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all concrete reinforcing. SHOP DRAWINGS A. Complete and accurate shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before any work is executed. Drawings shall show framing plans, details, bending diagrams, sizes and spacing of members, relationship to contiguous work, scale elevations of all reinforced concrete walls, and all other pertinent information. Details shall be carried out in accordance with the A.C.I. rules. B. Contractor shall submit one black and white print and one reproducible with each submission. Cost of all prints required from the reproducible, including prints required by the Engineer, shall be borne by this Contractor. MATERIALS A. Deformed reinforced steel shall conform with SPECIFICATIONS FOR NEW BILLET-STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT,ASTM A-615, GRADE 60. B. Deformations on deformed bars shall conform with SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEFORMATIONS OF DEFORMED STEEL BARS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT, ASTM A-305. C. Welded wire fabric shall comply with ASTM A-185. PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Metal supports, ties and spacers for reinforcement shall be rustproof of proper size, and strength to ensure against displacement during pouring operations. For structural slabs placed on ground, provide legs of slab bolsters and continuous high chairs with continuous plates. B. All reinforcement shall be bent cold. Minimum radius of bend shall be four diameters for bars 5/8 inch round or less, and six diameters for larger bars. C. At intersections,rods shall be securely wired together. D. Contractor shall exercise extreme care to prevent discoloration of exposed concrete surfaces by reinforcement. E. All reinforcement shall be inspected in the forms before concreting starts by the Engineer. Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to any pour. END OF SECTION 03200—CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DIVISION 3 —Page 4 of 8 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE RELATED SECTIONS See Section 09672 Resinous Flooring for concrete floor coating. REFERENCES Except as shown or specified otherwise, the Work of this Section shall conform to the requirements of Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 301-89 of the American Concrete Institute. Materials used to produce concrete and testing thereof shall comply with the applicable standards listed in the New York State Building Code, Chapter 19 Concrete. QUALITY ASSURANCE Concrete batching plant shall be currently approved as a concrete supplier by the New York State Department of Transportation. PROPORTIONING(Amendments to ACI 3019 Chapter 3): A. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi for structural footings, foundations, floor slabs, exterior slabs, ramps and stairs. B. Weight: Normal weight as indicated, Lightweight Concrete (for floor fills): Air-dry unit weight between 95 and 115 lb/cu ft. C. Durability: 1. Concrete shall be air-entrained. Design air content shall be 6 percent by volume, with an allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent for total air content. Entrained air shall be provided by use of an approved air-entraining admixture. Air-entrained cement shall not be used. D. Slump: 4000 psi Normal Weight Concrete: Between 2 inches and 3 inches. E. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures in concrete unless specified or approved in writing by the Engineer. F. Selection of Proportions: Concrete proportions shall be established on the basis of previous field experience or laboratory trial batches, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. Proportion mix with a minimum cement content of 564 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. DIVISION 3 —Page 5 of 8 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 5)e A. Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed steel bars. B. Fabric Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, fabricated into flat sheets unless otherwise indicated. C. Bar Supports: Galvanized steel or AISI Type 430 stainless steel, and without plastic tips. D. Tie Wire: Black annealed wire, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. PRODUCTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 7) A. Provide ready-mixed concrete, either central-mixed or truck-mixed. i EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not use items of aluminum for mixing, chuting, conveying, forming or finishing concrete, except magnesium alloy tools may be used for finishing. O B. Keep excavations free of water. Do not deposit concrete in water. C. Hardened concrete, reinforcement, forms, and earth which will be in contact with fresh concrete shall be free from frost at the time of concrete placement. O D. Prior to placement of concrete, remove all hardened concrete spillage and foreign materials from the space to be occupied by the concrete. FORMWORK(Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 4) A. Chamfer all exposed external corners of concrete. PLACING REINFORCEMENT (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 5) A. At the time concrete is placed, reinforcement shall be free of mud, oil, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other materials or coatings that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. PLACING CONCRETE (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 8) A. Operation of truck mixers and agitators and discharge limitations shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94. B. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 10) A. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes DIVISION 3 —Page 6 of 8 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE below: 1. Rough Form Finish for concrete surfaces not exposed to view. 2. Smooth Form Finish for concrete surfaces exposed to view. 3. Smooth Rubbed Finish for exterior concrete surfaces exposed to view. 4. Grout Cleaned Finish for interior concrete surfaces exposed to view. FINISHING SLABS (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 11) A. Slabs On Grade: Provide key type joints unless otherwise shown. Tool exposed joints. B. Finish Schedule: Except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide the finishes below: 1. Broom Finish for exterior slabs. Texture as approved by the Engineer. 2. Smooth Finish for interior slab. C. Finishing, General: Provide monolithic finishes on concrete floors and slabs without the addition of mortar or other filler material. Finish surfaces in true planes, true to line, with particular care taken during screeding to maintain an excess of concrete in front of the screed so as to prevent low spots. Screed and darby concrete to true planes while plastic and before free water rises to the surface. Do not perform finishing operations during the time free water(bleeding) is on the surface. CURING AND PROTECTION (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 12) A. Maintain concrete surfaces in a moist condition for at least 7 days after placing, except where otherwise indicated. B. For surfaces of exterior slabs (on grade), apply chemical curing and anti-spalling compound in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. C. All concrete surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry. Dirt, oil, loose concrete, salts, and other contaminants shall be wire brushed or grit blasted until a bare surface is obtained. D. A minimum of two (2) coats shall be applied to concrete. A minimum of 24 hours must elapse before application of the second coat. Do not use if epoxy coating is to be installed. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (Amendments to ACI 301, Chapter 16) A. The Contractor shall make a maximum of(2) two test cylinders per truck load of concrete _ delivered to the site for testing by a testing lab. Sampling to be taken as per ASTM C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. Concrete shall be sampled from the middle of the load. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the Engineer with the test results of each concrete test cylinder tested at 7 and 28 days for each truck load. DIVISION 3 —Page 7 of 8 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE LABORATORY TESTS The Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and coordinating of all testing. All laboratory costs in establishing the design mix and testing of cylinders shall be borne by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 03300 - CAST-Ili-PLACE CONCRETE i O 1 DIVISION 3 —Page 8 of 8 DIVISION 5 -METALS GENEIA,L The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO. 5-I/IIETALS Included in this Division are the following sections: 05120 Structural Steel r- r i DIVISION 5 - Page 1 of 7 DIVISION 5 -METALS SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL STEEL SCOPE A. The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all structural steel as shown on the Drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the following: 1. Furnishing, fabricating and erecting all structural steel work as shown on the Drawings. 2. Furnishing anchor bolts for setting under other sections of the Specifications. 3. Bearing plates for beams. 4. Shop and field painting. 5. Preparation of shop, erection and detail drawings. 1 6. Hangers and struts. DRAWINGS A. Submit shop and erection drawings for review in accordance with the requirements of the O General Conditions, immediately on award of Contract,based on design drawings. B. Materials shall not be fabricated or delivered to the site before the shop drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer, and returned to the Steel Contractor. Shop drawings shall include layouts and details showing the sizes of members, connections, cuts, holes, welds, bolts, etc. Q Provisions for the connection of other work shall be indicated. All Welds shall be indicated by standard welding symbols contained in the "Structural Welding Code" of the American Welding Society. Shop drawings shall show the size, length and type of each weld. C. Review of shop drawings will be for size and arrangement of principal and auxiliary do members and strength of connections. Errors in dimensions shall be the Contractor's responsibility. DIMENSIONS I The Contractor must verify all measurements at the building, especially when his work is subsequent to other work of the building and is to join it and will be held responsible for any error in said measurement unless he notified the Engineer in time for proper adjustment to be made. This Contractor must cooperate with other contractors of the several trades so that work will not be constructed prematurely and have to be taken down to allow the construction of work that should have had precedence. All work so done must be adjusted and must be replaced at the Contractor's cost. Dimensions shown on the structural drawings shall be verified and supplemented. DIVISION 5 -Page 2 of 7 DIVISIONS-METALS MATERIALS A. All structural steel and accessories shall be new. B. Structural steel (Beams): conform to ASTM Specification A-572, Grade 50 (or A- 992), latest edition. C. Structural steel (Columns): conform to ASTM Specification A-500, Grade B, latest edition. D. All other steel: conform to ASTM Specification A-36, latest edition. E. High strength bolts: conform to ASTM A-325, latest edition. F. All stock material shall be of quality equal to that called for in Paragraph A above. Mill test reports shall constitute sufficient records as to materials taken from stock. G. Unidentified stock material, if free from surface imperfections, may be used for shore sections of minor importance or for small unimportant details where precise physical properties of the material would not affect strength of structure, as approved by the Engineer. H. No material containing plugged or filled holes will be accepted. I. Structural steel exposed to view in finish work shall be uniformly rolled true to section, without kinks,bends or surface imperfections. J. Welding Electrodes and Flux Combination: Use 70XX Class Electrodes. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Except where otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, all materials, design, fabrication, erection and inspection shall comply with Specifications for DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS and also CODE OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR STEEL BUILDINGS AND BRIDGES latest edition, issued by the American Institute of Steel Construction. B. The design of members and connections for any portions of the structure not indicated on the Drawings shall be completed by the fabricator, and shop drawings submitted to the Engineer for review before fabrication. C. Welding, where permitted shall be in accordance with STANDARD CODE FOR ARC AND GAS WELDING IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION of the American Welding Society. D. All pieces having assigned positions shall have a distinguishing mark plainly indicated thereon and near one end. These markings shall agree with those given on the Drawings relating thereto, or calling for those pieces. DIVISION 5 -Page 3 of 7 DIVISION 5 -METAI_,S E. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all errors of fabrication and erection and for correct fitting of structural members to each other and to adjacent work. F. Templates shall be furnished for setting of anchor bolts and other bolts and items. Templates and bolts shall be delivered within such time as will not delay progress of concrete and masonry work. CHECKING MEASUREMENTS, EXAMINATION OF FOUNDATIONS The Contractor, before commencing with the work, shall check all governing dimensions at the building and the levels of all footings on which the work is to stand, and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. SUBSTITUTION OF SECTIONS Substitution of sections or modifications of details shall be made only if accepted by the Engineer. Substituted sections, if permitted, shall be of strength equal to those shown on Drawings and shall not interfere with Architectural and Mechanical requirements. DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All work shall be fabricated in ample time so as not to delay the progress of the work, and shall be delivered at such time as required for the proper coordination of the work. B. Competent workmen and suitable equipment shall be on the job at the time of delivery to properly handle and receive the material. C. All materials shall be kept clean and stored and handled in such a manner as to cause a U minimum of inconvenience and to avoid injury in any way. FABRICATION A. Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints. Shearing U and punching shall leave clean,true lines and surfaces. B. All shop connections shall be high strength friction type bolts, or welded, except where welded connections are indicated on Drawings or specially authorized by the Engineer. Field connections shall be bolted, except where welding is required. C. Bolts shall be 3/4 inch in diameter, except where otherwise noted. Holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than nominal diameter of the bolts. D. Holes in bearing plates shall be drilled. Grout holes shall be provided in column bearing plates where required. DIVISION 5 -Page 4 of 7 DIVISION 5 -METALS E. Contractor shall do all cutting, drilling, fitting, blocking, reinforcing, etc. of structural steel as required for the proper fabrication, connection and erection of work and as may be required for passing through, support or attachment thereto of work of other trades, where shown on Drawings, where required by site conditions or where instructions for same are given. Extent and location of all such drilling or cutting of each member shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. F. Provide standard AISC framed beam connections wherever possible. Web connections shall be double angle connections. End connections shall be of sufficient strength to develop maximum reaction of the member,plus any eccentric load. G. Connections shall be so arranged as to avoid eccentricity so far as possible. H. Field Connections. All field connections shall be made with high strength friction type bolts. I. End connections shall be of sufficient strength to support safely the maximum reactions of carrying member,plus any load due to eccentricity. WORKMANSHIP AND ERECTION A. Except as otherwise shown or specified, details of erection shall be in accordance with the Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel. B. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to correct errors in shop fabrication or deformations which result from handling and transportation and prevent the proper assembly. C. Corrections shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Location of anchor bolts shall be verified by Steel Contractor before erection of structural steel work. E. All members shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted accurately prior to final fastening. Tolerances shall conform to A.I.S.C. code of Standard Practice. Fastening of splices of compressions members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought completely into contact. F. As erection progresses, the work shall be fastened securely to take care of all dead load, wind and erection stresses. All structural steel shall have suitable temporary braces to hold it in position until permanently secure. G. Field cutting of structural steel may only be done with prior consent of the Engineer. Burning of holes for bolted connections will not be permitted, and violation of this clause will be sufficient cause for the rejection of any piece in which a burned hole exists. DIVISION 5 - Page 5 of 7 DIVISION 5-METALS WELDING A. Welds shall be made only by operators who have been previously qualified by tests as prescribed in STANDARD QUALIFICATION PROCEDURE of the American Welding Society to perform type of work required, except that this provision need not apply to tack welds later incorporated into finished welds carrying calculated stresses. B. Appearance, quality of work and methods of correction for defective work where welding, is permitted shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society publication CODE FOR ARC-WELDING IN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION. PAINTING AND CLEANING A. All steel work shall receive a shop coat except as follows: 1. Milled bearing surfaces. 2. Contact surfaces of high-strength bolted friction connections. 1 3. Within two inches of field welds unless paint is certified weldable. B. Cleaning: 1. All interior steel work, except steel visible inside the finished building, to be shop painted shall be cleaned in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP2, Hand-Tool Cleaning. Steel which will be visible inside the finished building shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP6, commercial blast cleaning. C. Painting and cleaning of structural steel shall conform to the requirements of Division 9 - 1! Finishes. INSPECTION A. Field inspection will include but not be limited to ascertaining that: U 1. Plates are level and properly placed. 2. Connections fit. 3. Welding is properly executed by qualified welders. 4. Torque of high strength bolted connections. B. Any weld which upon examination or inspection is found to be defective, shall be removed to the satisfaction of the inspector and the weld shall be remade. This Contractor shall remake the welds at no additional cost to the Owner and shall in addition bear all costs of DIVISION 5 -Page 6 of 7 DIVISION 5-KETALS i examination and inspection of the welds that have been remade. C. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish such facilities and provide such assistance as may be required for proper inspection. D. Reports shall be made of each inspection and shall be distributed in accordance with directions issued by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 05120—STRUCTURAL S'T'EEL DIVISION 5 - Page 7 of 7 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS—DIVISION 6—WOOD &PLASTIC Included in this Division are the following sections: 06100 Rough Carpentry 06180 Microllam(LVL) 06402 Architectural Woodwork/Custom Casework DIVISION 6 -Page 1 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06100 -ROUGH CARPENTRY SCOPE I A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all rough carpentry work including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Wood framing, blocking, nailers, and all other rough carpentry required for work under this Section and for other trades. 2. Rough Hardware 3. Plywood sheathing. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber grades shall conform to the grading rules of the Association having jurisdiction and shall bear the official grade and trademark of the Inspection Bureau of the Association and a mark of mill identification. Moisture content of rough lumber shall not exceed 19 percent p N. B. All materials of every kind entering into the construction work herein specified shall be of the best obtainable for the use required. Use only well seasoned lumber of sound stock, free from sap, shakes or any other defects which will impair its strength or appearance. Use lumber D4S free from warp that cannot be corrected in the process of nailing or bolting. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver all lumber and plywood to the site and immediately pile in stacks to insure drainage and free circulation. Cover stacks with tarps or other watertight covering. JOB CONDITIONS Provide and maintain protection during the life of the contract for all materials and work installed under this Section and for other work requiring protection. MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Blocking and Nailers: As required for supporting or attaching accessories. 2. Framing: douglas fir unless otherwise indicated. 3. Light framing; 2 inches through 4 inches thick, less than 6 inches wide: Douglas Fir Standard and Better grade, except Stud grade for stud framing unless otherwise DIVISION 6 -Page 2 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC noted. 4. Structural Framing; 2 inches through 4 inches thick, 6 inches wide and wider: Douglas Fir No. 2 grade unless otherwise noted. B. Board Lumber; less than 2 inches thick: 1. Exposed Board Lumber, for Paint Finish: Pre-primed finger jointed Pine, poplar or approved equal. , 2. Concealed Board Lumber: Southern Pine No. 3 or spruce C. Plywood 1. Exposed Wall sheathing- %"A.P.A. Rated tongue and groove or approved equal. D. Wood I-Joists: 1. Sizes and series as shown on the framing plans. 2. Flange members, web members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions of the ICC-ES Report No. ESR-1153. 3. Install as per the manufacturer's instructions. E. Rough Hardware: 1. Provide all items of rough hardware of every description, including nails, spikes, screws, bolts, lags, anchors, ramsets, ties, expansion shields and bolts, strap irons, and other items which are required to assemble or secure the work shown or specified herein. 2. Fastenings for securing wood grounds, blocking and similar work to masonry, shall be of metal of a type and spacing best suited to conditions, subject to approval of the Architect. F. All other materials as herein specified. INSPECTION A. Carefully check, verify and compare all dimensions and conditions at the building which affect the size, construction, and installation of items or features provided under this Section with those given on the drawings. Report all discrepancies and conflicts, including those between different materials or installations to the Architect in writing for correction and adjustment. DIVISION 6 -Page 3 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC B. Coordinate with other trades on details of construction of adjoining installations which have not been completed. INSTALLATION � A. All framing shall be in accordance with details indicated on the drawings. Set framing accurately to required lines and levels. Do all nailing and spiking in a thorough manner using nails of ample sizes to secure framing rigidly in place. Provide any special framing as required to complete work. B. Furnish and install all wood grounds and/or furring required for the securing in place of all finished carpentry work, interior wood finish and other items furnished by this or other contractors including trim moldings, shelving, frames, covers, stools, aprons, etc. I C. Install suitable blocking for finish carpentry and similar work wherever necessary to provide proper nailing and fastening at the required lines or levels. O END OF SECTION 06100—ROUGH CARPENTRY O O I DIVISION 6 - Page 4 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06180—MICROLLAMS SCOPE This work includes the complete fiirnishings and installation of all Microllam®laminated veneer lumber(LVL) as shown on the drawings herein specified and necessary to complete the work. CODE APPROVALS These products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. report ESR-1387. SUBMITTALS A. Drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building shall be provided B. Fabrication and/or cutting shall not proceed until the architect and/or engineer have approved the submittal package. MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with ICC ES ESR-1387. B. Adhesives shall be of the waterproof type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D- 2559. FABRICATION Microllam®LVL shall be manufactured by Weyerhaeuser or an approved equal in a plant listed in the reports referred to above and under the supervision of an approved third-party inspection agency. It shall be manufactured in a continuous process with all grain parallel with the length of the members. All members are to be free of finger or scarf joints or mechanical connections in full-length members. TOLERANCES (DRY MATERIAL) Finished Length(as specified): ± 1/4" Width/Depth <3.5"wide/< 14"deep: ± 1/8" > 3.5"wide/> 14"deep: t 3/16" DIVISION 6 - Page 5 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD lea PLASTIC IDENTIFICATION Microllam®LVL shall be identified by a stamp indicating the product type and grade and ICC ES evaluation report number, manufacturer's name, plant number and the independent inspection agency's logo. INSTALLATION Microllam®LVL, if stored prior to installation, shall be protected from the weather. It shall be installed in accordance with the plans and any Weyerhaeuser drawings and installation suggestions. Temporary construction loads that cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. Safety bracing is to be provided by the installer to keep the Microllam®LVL straight and plumb as required and to assure adequate lateral support for the individual Microllam®LVL members and the entire system until the sheathing material has been O applied. The contractor may give notification to the manufacturer prior to installation of Trus Joist products to review and discuss product installation guidelines. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the provisions of ASTM D-5456. 1 WARRANTY The products delivered shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and material. The products, when correctly installed and maintained, shall be warranted to perform as designed for the normal and expected life of the building. I END OF SECTION 06180—MICROLLAMS (LVL) DIVISION 6 -Page 6 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC SECTION 06402 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/CUSTOM CASEWORK SCOPE This section specifies requirements for the cabinets and countertops to be supplied and installed. PRODUCTS A. No particle board or particle board core plywood may be used in any part of the work except laminate tops discussed below, and shall be specifically excluded. (Laminate tops as discussed below excepted.) B. Plywood shall be all hardwood veneer core. C. Plastic Laminate Clad Millwork may be used only if approved by the Owner. Doors and drawers shall be fully clad including inside faces of doors. D. Minimum grades for plastic laminates shall be as follows (NEMA/ ISO / Inch Thickness): For horizontal surfaces use HW62/HCS/.062" or GP50/HGS/.050" and for vertical surfaces use BK50BGS/.050". 1. Approved manufacturers of plastic laminate are: a. Wilson Art b. Formica C. Nevamar d. Pionite E. Hardware shall be as indicated 1. Drawer glides shall be heavy duty rated. 2. Hinges shall be concealed type full metal with no plastic parts. 3. Hardware for adjustable shelves on walls shall be Heavy duty type equal to the K-V standard and bracket system. 4. Approved hardware manufacturers are: a. McKinney b. K&V C. Blum d. Stanley e. Gras F. Plastic laminate tops and back splashes are to be fabricated using 3/" plywood unless DIVISION 6 -Page 7 of 8 DIVISION 6—WOOD & PLASTIC O approved otherwise. Edges and joints shall be tight, glued and sealed. Post formed tops and splashes are not allowed. In those areas where sinks are applied to the underside of counter tops the tops shall be fabricated from 7 ply birch plywood (3/4" minimum) with an "A" surface one side. Do not use water based laminate glues on any counter top. EXECUTION A. Drywall screws will not be allowed for the attachment and installation of millwork. O B. Fabricate case bodies with stop dadoes if transparent finish. C. Drawers shall be lock shouldered or multiple dovetailed and have applied fronts. Bodies shall be hardwood or 7 ply plywood. Bottoms shall be hardwood panel product or masonite hardboard full or stop dadoed. O D. Exposed surfaces shall be hardwood. All drawers shall ride on full suspension drawer glides,not wood keels. E. Shelves shall be edged plywood or solid lumber. Janitor and storage room shelving shall be p AWI"Economy"grade except no particle board is allowed. F. Plastic laminate application shall be specified as follows: 1. Apply side edging first,then top surface,with top surface overlapping side edging. 2. Installations shall be by skilled tradesmen. In the cases where fabricator and installer are not one and the same,product and project guarantee shall not be compromised. END OF SECTION 06402 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK/CUSTOM CASEWORK DIVISION 6 - Page 8 of 8 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contracts for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO. 7-THERMAL &MOISTURE PROTECTION Included in this Division are the following sections: 07111 Bituminous Dampproofing 07210 Building Insulation 07920 Sealants &Caulking DIVISION 7 - Page 1 of 6 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION O SECTION 07111 -BITUMINOUS DAMP PROOFING SUBMITTALS O A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions, for each material specified. PROJECT CtINDITIONS dl A. Apply damp proofing in clear dry weather. Do not apply damp proofing below 40 degrees F. MATERIALS O A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Asphalt Emulsion, heavy duty, fibrated; ASTM D 1227, Type IV. PREPARATION O A. Comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations for preparation of type of surface shown or indicated to receive damp proofing. B. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be damp proofed of soil, debris and all foreign matter. O Allow cleaned surfaces to thoroughly dry. C. On porous surfaces, except new concrete masonry units, apply a uniform coating of asphalt primer. Q APPLICATION A. Provide continuous uniform damp proofing coating, 3/32 inch minimum dry thickness, on surfaces shown or scheduled to be damp proofed. Apply damp proofing by brush. B. Damp proof vertical wall surfaces to within 4 inches of finished grade at top of walls. O At bottom of walls, extend damp proofing across horizontal projection of footing and down face of footing approximately 2 inches. END OF SECTION O DIVISION 7 -Page 2 of 6 O DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 -BUILDING INSULATION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each type of insulation specified. 1. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with the specified thermal resistance and vapor resistance qualities. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not allow insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. B. Do not deliver flammable insulation materials to the project site more than 2 days ahead of the time of installation. Protect at all times against ignition. C. Protect insulation materials subject to deterioration by sunlight from exposure to sunlight. D. Complete the installation and concealment of insulation materials as rapidly as possible. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with the installation of insulation on walls or under slabs until the Work which follows (and which conceals the insulation) is ready to be performed. B. Examination of Substrate: Examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation Work is to be performed. Do not proceed with the insulation Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MATERIALS A. Rigid Insulation: Expanded polystyrene thermal insulation boards; ASTM C 578 1. R-Value: R-10 @ 75 degrees F. 2. Edges and Ends: Square or tongue-and-groove at manufacturer's option. All edges to be taped with approved tape. B. Fiberglass Blanket Insulation: Faced, flexible fiber glass insulation manufactured to conform with the Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA) Standard 202, having an R value of 38 for roof insulation and an R value of 20 for wall DIVISION 7 -Page 3 of 6 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION O insulation. Facing to be UL listed, vapor retarder material consisting of white metallized polypropylene film, scrim reinforcement and kraft paper laminated together with a flame resistant adhesive. O C. Loose Granular Insulation: Perlite (expanded volcanic aggregate); ASTM C 549 or Vermiculite (expanded or exfoliated micaceous mineral aggregate); ASTM C 516. 1. R-Value (Perlite): 6 Inches Thick: R= 16.2. 2. R-Value and Minimum Weight (Vermiculite): 8 Inches Thick: R= 19.0 O @ 2.6 psf. C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: The type recommended by the insulation manufacturer. O D. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type of application shown and condition of substrate. INSTALLATION O A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. O B. Extend insulation full thickness over entire surface to be insulated. Apply a single layer of insulation of the required thickness, unless otherwise indicated or required to make up the total thickness. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. O C. Install insulation with factory applied barrier membrane facing the warm side of building spaces. Replace insulation with ruptures in barrier membrane. D. Close off openings in areas to receive loose insulation to permanently prevent escape of insulation. O ENI) OF SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION DIVISION 7 -Page 4 of 6 0 DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SEC'T'ION 07920-SEALANTS AND CAULLKINGS WORD INCLUDED A. Caulking of exterior joints formed by the intersection of different materials, such as masonry and concrete, masonry and metal, wood with masonry or metal, and adjacent dissimilar materials. B. Caulking of joints at heads,jambs and sills of door frames and windows. C. All other caulking where indicated on Drawings or required by building conditions. .DELIVERY A. Materials delivered to the job site shall bear the quality label and the name or trademark of the approved manufacturer; shall be new, unopened and from fresh stock, and shall be the same products and manufacture as approved. Caulking tubes shall bear label indicating conformance to referenced Federal Specifications. MATERIALS A. Caulking compound for general exterior application shall be "Tremco's Dymeric", a two- part polytremdyne polymer sealant conforming to Federal Specifications TT-S-00227E as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio. Approved equivalent items of the following manufacturers any be provided: Pecora Chemical Corp., Harleysville, Pa. or Products Research and Chemical Corp., Burbank California. B. Caulking compound for general interior application shall be "Tremco"s Caulking Compound" an oleo-resinous caulking compound conforming to Federal Specifications TT-0598B as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio. Approved equivalent items of the following manufacturers may be provided: Pecora Chemical Corp., Harleysville, Pa., or Products Research and Chemical Corp., Burbank, California. C. Colors of Caulking Compound-As selected by the Engineer. D. Primer-A quick drying, non-staining liquid as recommended by the caulking compound manufacturer. Primer shall be used in all installations unless the caulking manufacturer specifically states otherwise. E. Back-up (Packing) Material - Polyethylene foam or hollow tubing or other approved non-staining material. INSTALLATION A. Surface Preparation - Remove dust, dirt, grease and other foreign and objectionable DIVISION 7 -Page 5 of 6 DIVISION 7-THERMAL ANIS MOISTURE PROTECTION q material. B. Application of Caulk 1. Joints deeper than 1/2" shall have backing material installed to within 1/4" of the face of the joint. 2. Apply caulking compound under sufficient pressure to force out all air and to completely U fill the joints, using a caulking gun with nozzles of widths as necessary to fit the various joints, except in locations where knife application is necessary. 3. Tool joints to a neat and smooth bead of uniform width, finishing flush with adjoining surfaces or tool to a concave profile. O 4. Upon completion of caulking, joints not completely filled shall have caulk roughened and then the joint shall be properly filled and tooled. 5. Adjacent surfaces soiled by caulking operations shall be cleaned immediately. ENI) OF SECTION 07920- SEALANTS AND CAULKINGS q q DIVISION 7 - Page 6 of 6 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO, 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS Included in this Division are the following sections: 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08310 Overhead Sectional Doors 08311 Overhead Coil Doors 08500 Metal Windows 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 8 - Page 1 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES STANDARDS O A. Steel Doors and Frames shall conform to requirements of Steel Door Institute (SDI 1000) as modified by local code requirements and as specified herein. Doors and frames shall bear a label indicating compliance with the referenced standards. O B. Doors - 1-3/4" thick, 18 gauge LF Series Galvannealed with polystyrene core for exterior and non Galvannealed for interior as manufactured by Steelcraft Building Products, Cincinnati, Ohio (513-745-6400) or approved equal, in elevations as indicated on the drawings. O C. Frames - Full width type 16 gauge. Include provisions for silencers and gaskets. Frame profile shall be one piece. D. Glass Lites—Insulated glass lites as shown on drawings. O E. Maximum Clearance ® top rail and hinge stile: 1/16" ■ lock stile: 1/8" floor and saddle: 1/4" O SHOP PAINTING All doors and frames are to be shop primed and painted. Primer shall be a thermosetting primer in which the vehicle is a mixture of epoxy and phenolic resins or straight epoxy formulated for metal priming and baking. O INSTALLATION OF DOORS & FRAMES A. Steel Door and Frames O 1. Install in accordance with the final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. 2. Placing frames - Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. O a. Make field splices in frames as detailed on final shop drawings, welded and finished to match factory work. b. Remove spreader bars only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured. O DIVISION 8 -Page 2 of 27 0 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 3. Door Installation a. Jambs and head: 3/32". b. Meeting edges, pairs of doors: 1/8". C. Bottom: 1/4", where no threshold. d. Bottom: At threshold: 1/8". e. Place fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 4. Adjustments Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable. INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE A. GENERAL 1. All finishing hardware specified in the Section 087,10 of this specification entitled "Finish Hardware" shall be received, accounted for, stored and applied under this Section. 2. Hardware shall be sorted and stored in space assigned by Contractor and shall be kept at all times under lock and key. The safety and preservation of all items delivered will be the,responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Hardware shall be carefully fitted and securely attached, in accordance with these specifications and the instructions of the various manufacturers. 4. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware" by NBHA unless otherwise noted on Drawings. (See Door Type elevations in the Drawings.) 5. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place during the finish application. After completion of the finishes, re-install each item. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. 6. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. DIVISION 8 -Page 3 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 7. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. °o. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles,bolts and similar items, if any. 9. All keys used shall be construction keys which are to be tagged with fiber discs as approved, clearly labeled with identifying inscriptions and then neatly arranged in a temporary cabinet. All construction keys shall be returned to the Owner. B. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite-type if no other recommended). Replace units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. O 2. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION A. CLEAN-UP At regular intervals during the course of the work, all debris and excess material shall be cleaned up and removed from the site. Upon completion of installation, clean all spaces of debris caused by woodwork installation. B. PROTECTION Protect all hardware, doors and frames and finish accessories from marring, defacement or other damage until final completion and acceptance of the project by the Owner. Repair or replace all defective units prior to final inspection as directed by the Architect. Any units that cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect shall be replaced with new units of same original design, at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES DIVISION 8 -Page 4 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS SEC'T'ION 08310 - OVERREAD SEC'T'IONAL.,DOORS SCOPE This section includes furnishing all labor, materials equipment and incidentals necessary to install electronically operated overhead sectional doors, operators, controls and accessories as shown on the contract documents. REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. , 2. ASTM A 924/A 924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. PERFORMANCE A. Exterior sectional doors shall be designed to withstand at least twenty (20) pounds per square foot windload. Windlocks shall be provided as required for windload protection. B. All doors shall be able to withstand a standard maximum of up to 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show application to project. B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for rolling service door assemblies, finishes, and operators. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data. 2. Replacement parts list. DIVISION 8 - Page 5 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 0 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects U of similar size and complexity, and trained and authorized by the door dealer to perform the work of this section. DELIVERY, S'T'ORAGE & HANDLING ,0 A. Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 0 WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents. PRODUCTS SECTIONAL,DOOR (BASIS OF DESIGN) 0 A. Manufacturer: Raynor Door, model TC300 (3", R-17.05 insulated commercial sectional doors) Contact: P.O. Box 448, 1101 East River Road, Dixon, IL 61021- 0448; Telephone: (800) 472-9667, (815) 288-1431; Fax: (815) 288-7142; E-mail: thegarage@raynor.com; website: www.raynor.com. 0 DOOR OPERATORS Raynor PowerHoist Optima with Contactor style motor starter(Model Series PHO) or Raynor Control Hoist Optima with Solid State motor controller(Model Series CHO). 1. Type: Trolley 0 DIVISION 8 - Page 6 of 27 DIVISION 8-.DOORS AND WINDOWS 2. Motor Horsepower Rating: Continuous Duty 1 HP. 3. Electrical Requirements: 115 volt single phase. 4. Duty Cycle: 30 cycles/hour. 5. Control Wiring: Contactor Style Motor starter 24 volt control with provisions for connection of safety edge to reverse and external radio control hook-up. Solid State motor Controller 24 volt control with provisions to select up to 6 standard wiring types plus delay on reverse, mid stop, maximum run timer, and door lock feature. 6. Contractor shall confirm door operator with the door manufacturer prior to ordering. DOOR SECTIONS A. Sections shall be mechanically interlocked and pressure bonded to a 2-7/8 inches (73 mm) thick extruded polystyrene core. Hinge reinforcement plates shall be 16 gauge edge plates and 16 gauge center plates, located within section interior at every hinge location. End stiles to be 14 gauge galvanized steel. B. Material: Steel sandwich construction, 3 inches (76mm) thick, roll formed from commercial quality, hot-dipped galvanized (G60 exterior) steel complying with ASTM A 653. Exterior and interior skin to be constructed of 25 gauge steel embossed stucco texture. C. Mounting: Sections mounted in door opening using Lap Jamb Angle Mounting: section overlap door jambs by 1 inch(25mm) on each side of door opening D. Insulation: Expanded polystyrene, R-value of 10.25. E. Seals: Interior and exterior skins to be separated by a continuous dual durometer vinyl seal held in place by a mechanical interlock to form a thermal break and complete weatherseal along section joint. Top of door to be provided with dual durometer vinyl standard. Bottom of door to have flexible U-shaped vinyl seal in an extruded aluminum retainer. F. Trussing: Doors designed to withstand a wind load of 12 P.S.F. Deflection of door in horizontal position to be maximum of 1/1 20th of door width. G. Color and Paint Type: Interior skins to have two coats of paint, one primer coat and one finish coat. Exterior to be powder coated. Color by owner. DIVISION 8 -Page 7 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS p H. Windows: Locations to comply with door elevations. a. Size: 36 inches by 14 inches full-view (square-edge) window encased in an Q extruded PVC frame. b. Glazing: Windows to be provided with insulated glazing units as follows: i. Glass consisting of two panes of 1/8 inch(3.2mm) thick DSB glass. TRACE Q A. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized steel (ASTM A-653), fully adjustable for adequate sealing of door to jamb or weather seal. COUNTERBALANCE SYSTEM d1 A. Type: Provided with aircraft-type, galvanized steel lifting cables with minimum safety factor of 5. HARDWARE O A. Hinges and Brackets: Fabricated from galvanized steel and white powder coating on hinges and u-bar B. Track Rollers: consistent with track size, with hardened steel ball bearings. Q C. Perimeter Seal: Provide complete weather stripping to reduce air infiltration. Weather stripping shall be replaceable. EXECUTION � MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS Comply with instructions and recommendations of door manufacturer. EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify through direct observation and field measurement that site conditions are acceptable for installation of doors, operators, controls and accessories. Ensure that openings square flush and plumb. B. Do not proceed with installation of doors, operators, controls and accessories until unacceptable conditions are corrected. DIVISION 8 -Page 8 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOOMS AND WIDOWS INSTALLATION General: Install door, track and operating equipment complete with all necessary accessories and hardware according to shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: At Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product installation and use recommendations, and periodic site visits to observe and ensure product installation is done in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Site Visits: two (2) ADJUSTING General: Lubricate bearings and sliding parts, assure weather tight fit around door perimeter and adjust doors for proper operation, balance, clearance and similar requirements. CLEANING A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace installed products damaged prior to or during installation. B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris from project site. END OF SECTION 08310 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS DIVISION 8 -Page 9 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08311 - OVERREAD COILING DOORS GENERAL O Description A. All rolling service doors shall be as manufactured by The Cookson Company or approved equal. Furnished material includes all guides, hoods, operating mechanisms and special features as pertaining to the particular type of door. B. .Work not to be furnished by The Cookson Company includes design of, material for and preparation of door openings but not limited to structural or miscellaneous iron work, access panels, finish painting, electrical wiring, conduit and disconnect switches. SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show application to project. O B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for rolling service door assemblies, finishes, and operators. C. Samples: Curtain slat, 1 foot long end piece. O D. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data. 2. Replacement parts list. PRODUCTS Materials A. The door curtain shall be constructed of interlocking slats-22 gauge. B. Guides are to be constructed to structural angle forming a channel for the curtain to travel in. O The guides shall be attached to the wall by minimum 1/2 inch fasteners. (Fastener type to be determined by type of surrounding mounting surface.) C. Brackets are to be constructed of steel plate and shall be bolted to the wall angle with 1/2 inch fasteners. D. All gears shall be cast iron with teeth cast from machine out patterns. The pinion gear shall not be less than a 3-inch pitch diameter. The gear ratio shall be designed for a maximum manual effort of not more than 30 pounds. E. The barrel shall be steel tubing of not less than 4 inches in diameter. Oil tempered torsion DIVISION 8 -Page 10 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS springs shall be capable of correctly counter balancing the weight of the curtain. The barrel shall also be designed to limit the maximum deflection to .03 inch per foot of opening width. F. Hoods shall be fabricated from 24 gauge galvanized steel. Hoods shall be formed to fit the curvature of the brackets. Operation A. Chain Operation shall operate with an endless chain and cast iron reduction gears. B. Motor Operation shall be of the proper size for the type of door selected and shall be activated by push button controls. Additional control stations for motor operator shall be as noted on the drawings. Locking Locking device shall be standard provided. Finish Galvanized steel curtain and hoods shall have "FinalCoate finish. All other exposed surfaces shall receive one coat of dark bronze rust inhibiting paint. EXECUTION Installation All Cookson Company Rolling Door products shall be installed by an authorized Cookson Distributor. Warranty Cookson Company Rolling;Door products shall be guaranteed for a period of one year against defects in workmanship and materials from the time of Contract completion. , ADJUSTING Adjust and lubricate doors and operating equipment to operate,smoothly. Adjust door fit and weatherstripping'to make a weathertight fit for the door perimeter. CLEANING Clean doors, and clean work area surfaces that have been soiled performing the Work. END OF SECTION 08311 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DIVISION 8 -Page 11 of27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS O SECTION 08500 —METAL WINDOWS SCONE Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all work including, but not limited to, installation of pre-engineered building manufacturer's standard aluminum fixed windows. � O QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and shall be the best quality for the purpose specified. O B. Performance 1. "U" values: ASHRAE .56, Tested .69 2. Structural Rating: A2-HP 50 to 100(dependent on window size) O 3. Air Infiltration Rating: A2-HP, .17 rating 4. Water Resistant Ratings: A2-HP, 9.34 rating SUBMITTALS O A. Before proceeding with the manufacture of aluminum windows, prepare and submit complete manufacturing and installation drawings, sh6wing all parts of all members indicating thickness of metal, details of construction, and methods of anchoring a relationship of abutting construction. DELIVER', STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver in ample time to facilitate the work of this Section. B. Take care to protect components during handling and storage. JOB CONDITIONS A. Protect surfaces of aluminum window components during and after installation to preclude any damage. O B. Remove and replace all work showing any defects or blemishes without additional expense to the Owner. - O DIVISION 8 - Page 12 of 27 J O DIVISION 8-DOOMS AND WINDOWS MATERIALS A. Aluminum Fixed Windows: 1. Frame, sash, and panel sections: Extruded aluminum shapes of alloy 6063-TS with a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 22000 P.S.I. with integral thermal structural barriers. Mainframe, sash and panel sections shall have a nominal wall thickness of not less than 0.062" and sills shall have a nominal wall thickness of not less than 0.078". 2. Glass shall be sealed, insulated tempered glazing. 3. Finish: Electrostatically applied baked acrylic enamel finish. Color shall be as selected by the Architect. INSPECTION A. Window openings shall conform to details, dimensions and tolerances shown on the window manufacturer's approved shop drawings. B. Conditions which may adversely affect the window installation must be corrected before installation commences. INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, as herein specified and as shown on the drawings. 1. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or vents. 2. Anchor units securely to surrounding construction with approved fasteners. 3. The exterior joints between the sash, trim and mullions shall be properly sealed watertight with an approved sealant and neatly pointed. 4. Tightly caulk all joints between metal and masonry to insure a watertight job. ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust windows for smooth operation. B. Adequately protect exposed portions of aluminum windows from damage caused by adjacent construction. C. At completion of project, remove protective materials and clean with plain water or water with soap or household detergent. END OF SECTION 08500-METAL WINDOWS DIVISION 8 - Page 13 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOOMS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE SCOPE Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required for finish hardware on swinging doors indicated on schedules and/or shown on drawings including but not limited to hinges, lock or latch sets, dead locks, cylinders, bolts, exit devices, push/pull units, closers and miscellaneous door and access control devices, protection plates, and other miscellaneous hardware. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: All finish hardware shall conform to all the following standards: k 1. Testing Laboratories: Underwriters Laboratory (UL) and or Warnock Hersey Fire Laboratories Division: All fire rated doors shall have hardware assemblies approved by one of the listed laboratories.Panic hardware UL Listed only. 2. National Fire Protection Association:NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA). 4. American National Standards Institute(ANSI). 5. American Disabilities Act(ADA). 6. Where required,products shall have MEA approval. B. All products specified shall comply with the Buy American Act. C. Supplier: Finish hardware shall be furnished by those having a minimum of 5 years of builders hardware experience and shall have in their employ at least one certified Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC)to correctly interpret the plans, detailed drawings and specifications. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the general contract documents., B. Hardware Schedule: Submit three (3) copies of a vertical hardware schedule. Horizontal schedules will not be accepted. Follow Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) guide lines for scheduling. At the end of the schedule list each door number with appropriate heading number and hardware set number. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work. Furnish final schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets have been approved. C. Product Data: Submit three (3) copies of the manufacturer's data for each item of DIVISION 8 - Page 14 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS hardware. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements. D. Keying Schedule: A key schedule showing all key numbers and spaces to which each permits entry, shall be provided. Consult with OWNER before submitting final key schedule. After final approval has been received, the schedule and the key cabinet, along with the key gathering envelopes containing keys for each lock endorsed with lock number and space designation, shall be turned over to the OWNERS. E. Samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to delivery of hardware, submit one (1) sample of each exposed hardware unit. Sample will be reviewed by the ARCHITECT for design, color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. Samples approved by the ARCHITECT shall be turned over to the OWNER for attic stock. F. Wiring Diagrams: Supplier shall furnish riser diagrams, wiring diagrams and point to point diagrams for all electrical hardware specified herein. These diagrams shall be included with the initial draft of the hardware schedule. DElLIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle, store, distribute, protect and install in accordance with the manufacture's instructions. Deliver packaged material in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. Deliver assemblies completely identified and with adequate protection for storage, handling and installation. B. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses; both before and after installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions in the package. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated and as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver packaged hardware items to the proper locations for installation. B. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory prepared for the installation of hardware. DIVISION 8 -Page 15 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS WARRANTIES A. The hardware manufacturers shall provide full replacement warranty as listed below. -Surface Closers 25 years -Exit Devices 3 years -Locksets etc. 1 year -Balance of hardware 1 year PRODUCTS MATERIALS AND JFABRICATION A. Hand of Door: The drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing shown. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness but in no case of lesser quality material. C. Fasteners: Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws. D. Screws: Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Finish exposed screws to match the hardware finish. E. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed, for the OWNERS continued maintenance,removal and replacement of hardware. F. Concealed Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when the door is closed except to the extent no standard manufacturer's units are available with concealed fasteners. Use thru bolts only where necessary to adequately fasten hardware to the door. HINGES A. Unless otherwise noted, all hinges shall be full mortise five knuckle ball bearing type, template, with non-rising loose pins. All out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. All hinges for 1-3/4" thick doors shall be 4"wide in the open position. For other thickness doors hinges shall be of a width to permit unobstructed swing of the doors. C. Size and weight of hinges shall conform to the following: -Up to 36" ------------4-1/2" standard weight DIVISION 8 -Page 16 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS -Over 36"to 48" --------5" heavy weight D. Quantity of hinges shall be provided to conform to the following: -Doors up to 60" in heights ------------------2 hinges -Doors 60" to 90" in height-----------------3 hinges -Doors 90" and over---------1 hinge every 30" in height E. All hinges shall be the products of one manufacturer. LOCKSETS,LATCIISETS ETC. A. Unless otherwise noted, all locksets and latchsets shall be heavy-duty cylindrical type, function as specified in hardware sets.Furnish wrought steel box strikes.Furnish curved lip strikes with proper lip lengths as required. KEYS, KEYING CYLINDERS AND KEY CABINET A. Keys: shall be nickel silver. All keys shall have visual key control and words "DO NOT DUPLICATE'embossed on one side. Furnish a quantity of keys as follows. -Grand Master Keys 5 each per group -Master Keys 5 each per group -Change Keys 3 each per cylinder -Construction Keys 5 B. Keying: All locks shall be construction keyed and master keyed to a new Best keying system. Hardware supplier shall meet with OWNER to establish keying requirements. All master keys shall be hand delivered to the Owner by the manufacturer or his representative. C. Cylinders: All cylinders shall be min. six pin interchangeable core and shall have visual key control. D. Key Cabinet: Provide a key control system set-up to include envelopes, labels, tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and standard metal cabinet with locked access. Capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for this project. Instruct OWNER'S representative on the operation of the key control system. DOOR CLOSING DEVICES A. All surface closers shall meet ANSI Al56.4 Grade 1 requirements. B. All closers shall be installed so that closer bodies are positioned on room side of doors to and from corridors, i.e., in-swing doors shall be regular arm. Out-swing doors shall have a parallel arm. Regular arm shall be used in connecting doors between rooms. DIVISION 8 -Page 17 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS EXECUTION A. Approval: As soon as practical after award of Contract and before a hardware schedule is prepared, and before any hardware is ordered or delivered to the project, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ARCHITECT for his written approval, copies of sample list, listing each of the different items of builders hardware and catalog cuts of each item. B. Templates: As soon as the hardware schedule is approved the hardware supplier shall furnish to the various fabricators, required templates for fabrication purposes. Templates shall be made available not more than(10) days after receipt of the approved hardware schedule. C. Packaging and Marking: All hardware shall be shipped with proper fastenings for secure application. Each package of hardware shall be legibly marked indicating the part of the work for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond with the item numbers shown on the approved hardware schedule. Keys shall be tagged within each package set and plainly marked on the face of the envelope with the key control number, door designation and all identification as necessary. D. Delivery: Delivery shall be made to the project site to the attention of the GENERAL CONTRACTOR. Where delivery of special hardware is required at any fabricator's plant, the hardware supplier shall make such delivery. INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" by BHMA,unless otherwise noted or directed by the ARCHITECT. B. Install each hardware unit in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by manufacturer. Replace units that cannot be adjusted. B. Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1) month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area,return to the work during the week prior to acceptance make a final check, and adjust all hardware items in such space or area. Adjust door control devices and compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct OWNERS personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. HARDWARE SETS A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements and is not intended for use as a final hardware schedule. Any items of hardware required by established standards or practices, or to meet state and local codes or proper door operation shall be furnished whether or not specifically called out in the following listed groups. DIVISION 8 - Page 18 of 27 DIVISION 8 a DOORS AND WINDOWS B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: 1. Hinges: Stanley, PBB and Bommer. 2. Locksets,Latchsets and Cylinders: Best,Donna and Schlage. 3. Door Closers: Stanley,Donna, and Norton. 4. Door Stops: Trimco,Rockwood and Ives. 5. Overhead Stops: ABH,Dorma and Glynn Johnson. 6. Seals and Saddles: Zero (no substitutions). 7. Flush Bolts: Trimco, Rockwood and Ives. 8. Push and Pulls: Trimco and Rockwood. 9. Exit Devices: Precision,Donna and Sargent. HARDWARE SET# 1 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Office Lock Best 93K7-AB-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit) x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET# I Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Office Lock Best 93K7-AB-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit) x US26D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 328A jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A HARDWARE SET# 1B Each to have: - Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Office Lock Best 93K7-AB-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#2 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D DIVISION 8 - Page 19 of 27 D S10N S-DOORS AND WINDOWS 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#2A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US32D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Overhead Stop ABH 1000 series x US32D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 328A @ jambs&head 1 Door Bottom Zero 367A 1 Saddle Zero (as detailed) HARDWARE SET#2B Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x Alum 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimeo 1229A HARDWARE SET#2C Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Closer/Stop Stanley D3550-S x Alum 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A @ jambs &head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A HARDWARE SET#3 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US32D 2 Flush Bolts Trimco W3917 x US26D 1 Dustproof Strike Trimco 3910 x US32D 1 Classroom Lock Best 93K7-R-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 2 Overhead Stops ABH 1000 series x US32D 2 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#4 Each to have: DIVISION 8 -Page 20 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS Hmges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Privacy Set Best 93K7-L-15D x US26D 1 Door Stop Trimco 1270WV x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#4A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Privacy Set Best 93K7-L-15D x US26D 1 Overhead Stop ABH 1000 series x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#4B Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Privacy Set Best 93K7-L-15D x US26D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x US26D 1 Stop Trimco 1270WV x US32D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 328A jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A HARDWARE SET#4C Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 set Push Pull Trimco 18944B x US32D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x US26D 1 Stop Trimco 1270WV x US32D 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 328A jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 355A HARDWARE SET#4D Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description) x US26D 1 set Push Pull Trimco 18944B x US32D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x US26D 1 Stop Trimco 1270WV x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#5 Each to have: 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Temporary Core Best(to suit) x US26D DIVISION 8 - Page 21 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit) x US26D HARDWARE SET# 6 Each to have: 2 Continuous Hinge Stanley 661HD 1 Exit Device Donna 2202 x 1702A x US32D 1 Exit Device Donna 2203 x 1703A x US32D 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Best (to suit)x US26D 1 Temporary Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 2 Door Closer w/stop Stanley 4550-CS x Alum 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs/head 1 set Astragal Seals Zero 328A x 328A 2 Door Bottoms Zero 8198A 1 Saddle Zero (as detailed) HARDWARE SET#7 Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge Stanley 661HD 1 Exit Device Donna 2103 x 1703A x US32D 1 Masterkeyed Cylinder Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Temporary Core Best (to suit)x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Door Closer w/stop Stanley 4550-CS x Alum 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs/head 1 Door Bottom Zero 8198A 1 Saddle Zero (as detailed) i HARDWARE SET# 8 Each to have: 2 Continuous Hinge Stanley 661HD 2 sets Push Pulls Trimco 18944B x US32D 2 Door Closers Stanley 4550 series x Alum 2 Stops Trimco W1211 x US32D 2 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET#9 Each to have: 1 Continuous Hinge Stanley 661HD 1 sets Push Pulls Trimco 1894-4B x US32D 1 Door Closer Stanley 4550 series x Alum 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A i DIVISION 8 - Page 22 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS HARDWARE SET# 10 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description) x US26D 1 Passage Set Best 93K0-N-15D x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D, 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET# 11 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Classroom Lock Best 93K7-R-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET# 11A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US26D 1 Classroom Lock Best 93K7-R-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Closer Stanley D3550 series x Alum 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 3 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET# 12 Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description) x US32D 2 Flush Bolts Trimco W3917 x US26D 1 Dustproof Strike Trimco 3910 x US32D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Stop Trimco W1211 x US32D 2 Silencers Trimco 1229A HARDWARE SET# 12A Each to have: Hinges Stanley(see description)x US32D 2 Flush Bolts Trimco W3917 x US26D 1 Dustproof Strike Trimco 3910 x US32D 1 Storeroom Lock Best 93K7-D-15D x US26D 1 Permanent Core Best(to suit)x US26D 1 Closer/Stop Stanley D3550-S x Alum - 1 set Weatherstripping Zero 429A jambs/head DIVISION 8 -Page 23 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS 2 Door Bottoms Zero 8193A 1 set Astragal Seals Zero 326A x 326A END OF SECTION 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE DIVISION 8 - Page 24 of 27 DIVISION S-DOORS AND WINDOWS, SECTION 08800 GLAZING SCOPE Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all work including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Clear Glass 2. Tempered Glass 3. Insulated Glass QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be free from'-defects impairing strength, durability or appearance and shall be of the best quality for the purpose specified. B. Glass shall meet Federal Specification DD-G-451 d. C. Glazing compound shall meet Federal Specification TT-G-410. SUBMITTALS Submit samples in accordance with the General Conditions, as requested by the Architect. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to job site in ample time to facilitate the work of this section. B. Store all glass with due care to prevent breakage. JOB CONDITIONS Protect all glass on the project before, during, and after installation. MATERIALS A. Clear Glass: Type 1 - Primary glass (annealed float) Class 1 Transparent, Quality q-3 Glazing Select; 1/4" thick except as otherwise indicated. B. Laminated Glass: 2 sheets Type 1-Primary Glass (annealed float) Class 1 Transparent, Quality q-5 Glazing B permanently laminated together with a 0.030" thick sheet of clear plasticized polyvinyl butyral. Finished thickness 1/4" except as otherwise indicated. C. Tempered Glass: Type 1-Primary Glass (annealed float) Class 1 Transparent; Quality q-5 Glazing B; heat strengthened,by manufacturer's standard process (after cutting to final DIVISION 8,- Page 25 of 27 i DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS, size) to achieve a flexural strength of 4 times normal glass strength. Provide with MANUFACTURER'S SEAL INSCRIBED ON EACH LIGHT, 1/4" thick except as otherwise indicated. D. Safety Glass: Laminated or Tempered as specified above for the following: 1. All doors,both exterior and interior. 2. All sidelights, both exterior and interior. 3. All vision panels, fixed or sliding. E. Insulated Glass: Two sheets of 1/4" thick Type 1-Primary Glass (annealed float) Class 1 Transparent, Quality q-3 glazing select; permanently and hermetically sealed together at edges with spacers, sealant and metal protective edge binding; to provide a dehydrated air space 1/2" thick with a-60 degree dew point. F. Butt Glazing Compound: Silicone sealant. G. Glazing Gaskets: Preformed glazing gaskets formulated of a neoprene compound conforming to the requirements of ASTM C542. Gaskets shall be as detailed on the drawings and shall be as manufactured by the Standard Products Co. H. Glazing Compound: "Dap 1012" as by Dap Inc. or approved equal. I. Joint cleaner, primer and sealer: Recommended by the manufacturer of the primary glazing material for each specific use. J. All other materials herein specified. MANUFACTURE Unless otherwise noted above, provide products manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., Libby-Owens and Ford Glass Co. or A.F.G. Industries, Inc. INSPECTION Examine conditions and be responsible for the proper arrangement and fit of the work. Correct discrepancies prior to proceeding with the work of this section. INSTALLATION A. Perform all work using mechanics skilled in their trade and execute work in a first class manner. B. Set all glass in a true plane, tight and straight, with proper and adequate clearance, firmly anchored to prevent rattling and looseness, with all edges cleanly cut; do not nip or seam 1 DIVISION 8 - Page 26 of 27 DIVISION 8-DOORS AND WINDOWS the edges. C. Cut and set sheet window glass with waves running horizontally. D. Set smooth surfaces of figured glass on the outside for exterior openings and on the corridor side for interior openings. E. Obtain and verify all measurements and size of work, accept responsibility for the correct and accurate fit of all work. F. Well bed and back putty glass and carefully remove all surplus glazing compound from doors, sash and adjoining work while still fresh. Finish glazing compound in true, even lines,neat and smooth faced. ADJUST AND CLEAN Upon completion of glazing, thoroughly clean all glass surfaces, correct all imperfections, replace and clean all damaged or broken glass before leaving project. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1 DIVISION 8 -Page 27 of 27 DIVISION 9 -FINISHES I GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA and other Contract documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION NO.9-FINISHES Included in this Division are the following sections: 09250 Gypsum Board 09512 Acoustical Ceiling Tiles 09672 Resinous Flooring 09912 Interior Painting DIVISION 9 -Page 1 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all gypsum drywall work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Type X Gypsum Board 2. Tape& Spackle 3. Trim and Accessories DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Store all materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the premises. JOB CONDITIONS In cold weather and during the period of gypsum board application and joint finishing, maintain within the building a uniform temperature within the range of 55° F to 70° F. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within the building during this same period. MATERIALS A. Type X Gypsum Wall Board: As required, 5/8" thick unless otherwise noted, 48" wide in lengths as long as practical to minimize number of joints. B. Fasteners: Type S Bugle head screws. Lengths as recommended by manufacturer for the various panel thicknesses. C. Corner Bead: Dur-A-Bead No. 103 D. Joint System: USG Perf-A-Tape Reinforcing Tape, with USG Ready-mixed Joint Compound All Purpose F. Other materials hereinafter specified. MANUFACTURE Above listed materials are manufactured by U.S. Gypsum. Equivalent products of National Gypsum or Georgia Pacific will be accepted. END OF SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD DIVISION 9 - Page 2 of 15 J V DIVISION 9-DISHES SECTION 09512—ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all'work including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tiles 2. Suspension Systems QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical materials and suspension system shall conform to the "Specifications for r Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceiling Suspension Systems" as published by the Acoustical Materials Association. B. The acoustical contractor shall be the franchised agent or installer of the materials approved for utilization on his project. In addition, the acoustical contractor shall have been regularly engaged in the installation of materials as described herein for a period of not less than five(5)years dating back from the date bids are received by the Owner. SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of each type of tile, lay-in panel, and suspension system for Architect's approval in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions. B. Color, finish and texture of materials delivered to job site shall match approved samples. C. Submit product data for each product to be installed. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to the job site in the manufacturer's original,unopened packages. a B. Delivered materials shall match the approved samples in all respects. C. Deliver cartons with seals unbroken bearing name of manufacturers. D. Store materials in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. GUARANTEE Guarantee, all materials and workmanship provided under this Section, for a period of one year from completion date, and on written demand by the Architect within that period, replace or DIVISION 9 -Page 3 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES correct any defective materials or workmanship at no additional cost to the Owner. MATERIALS A. The manufacturer's standard recommendation shall be the minimum acceptable method, material, accessory and/or procedure. However, where said manufacturer's standard recommendations are lesser in any way, shape or form than anything contained herein the acoustical contractor shall proceed in accordance with the provisions of this specification insofar as they may be applicable. B. Ceiling sizes, as required by field conditions. C. Acoustical Tiles 1. Armstrong"Cirrus" a. color white b. size 24"X 24" C. edge square lay-in d. thickness 3/4" D. Metal Suspension System 1. 15/16"Prelude Exposed Grid—Direct hung suspension system INSPECTION Inspect the work on which this section is dependent and report any discrepancies to the Architect,in writing,prior to proceeding with installation. INSTALLATION A. Install ceiling system as per the manufacturer's instructions. B. Install acoustical material in type, size and surface design as specified above. C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less than half width tiles at borders. D. Remove and replace all damaged members. CLEANING A. Following installation clean and leave free from blemishes and defects, all dirty, abraded or discolored surfaces of acoustical work. Remove and replace all work which is damaged or improperly installed at no additional cost to the Owner. Leave the entire installation in a complete and satisfactory condition. DIVISION 9 -Page 4 of 15 DIVISION 9-F'SAES B. All other trades including other prime contractors damaging or causing damage to the finish work under this section shall compensate the Owner,who in turn shall compensate the acoustical contractor for repairs or replacements necessitated by said damage. REPLACEMENT MATERIALS Deliver two (2)unopened cartons of each type of acoustical tile to the Owner at the job site upon _'► substantial completion of the work and store where directed. END OF SECTION 09512—ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 1 DIVISION 9 -Page 5 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES SECTION 09672—RESINOUS FLOORING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This section includes a resinous flooring system as specified. The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application of a pigmented epoxy based floor coating system with urethane topcoat. The system shall have the color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 23 mils. It shall be applied to the prepared area as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Floor system basis of design is the Dur-A-Glaze #4 epoxy coating with urethane (Armor Top) topcoat (15-19 mils). C. Approved equals to be reviewed through submittals. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:. Latest edition of Manufacturer's literature including performance data and installation procedures. B. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product being used. C. Samples: A 3 x 3 inch square sample of the proposed system. Color, texture, and thickness shall be representative of overall appearance of finished system subject to normal tolerances. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years of experience in the production, sales, and technical support of epoxy and urethane industrial flooring and related materials. B. The Applicator shall have experience in installation of the flooring system as confirmed by the manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the product specified. C. No requests for substitutions shall be considered that would change the generic type of the specified System. D. System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Food, Drug Administration (FDA), and local Health Department. E. A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General Contractor and the Owner to review and clarification of this specification, application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and production schedule. DIVISION 9 -Page 6 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping 1. All components of the system shall be 'delivered to the site in the Manufacturer's packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number. B. Storage and Protection 1. The Applicator shall be provided with a storage area for all components. The area shall be between 60 F and 90 F, dry, out of direct sunlight and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations. 2. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components shall be kept on site for review by the Engineer or other personnel. C. Waste Disposal 1. The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for non- hazardous waste generated during installation of the system. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Requirements 1. Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are between 60 F and 90 F providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted. 2. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 % and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 F above the dew point. 3. The Applicator shall ensure that adequate ventilation is available for the work area. 4. The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting level during the preparation and installation of the system. B. Conditions of new concrete to be coated with epoxy material. 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days and have fully cured a minimum of twenty eight days in accordance with ACI-308 prior to the application of the coating system pending moisture tests. 2. Concrete shall have a flat rubbed finish, float or light steel trowel finish(a hard DIVISION 9 -Page 7 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES steel trowel finish is neither necessary or desirable). 3. Sealers and curing agents should not to be used. 4. Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor barrier to protect against the effects of vapor transmission and possible delamination of the system. C. Safety Requirements 1. All open flames and spark-producing equipment shall be removed from the work area prior to commencement of application. 2. "No Smoking" signs shall be posted at the entrances to the work area. 3. The Owner shall be responsible for the removal of foodstuffs from the work area. 4. Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum. WARRANTY A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. warrants that material shipped to buyers at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially to Dur-A-Flex, Inc. published literature if used in accordance with the latest prescribed procedures and prior to the expiration date. B. Dur-A-Flex, Inc. liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchase. PRODUCT'S FLOORING A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Gard, Epoxy-Based seamless flooring system 1. System Materials: a. Primer: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Glaze#4 WB resin and hardener. b. Base Coat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Glaze#4 resin and hardener. C. Topcoat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Armor Top resin, hardener and grit. 2. Patch Materials a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Glaze Rapid- Patch b. Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over '/a inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Crete DIVISION 9 - Page 8 of 15 IDIVISION 9-FINISHES MANUFACTURER A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., 95 Goodwin Street, East Hartford, CT 06108 Phone: (860) 528-9838, Fax: (860) 528-2802 B. Manufacturer of an approved system shall be single source and made in the USA. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Primer Dur-A-Glaze#4 WB 1. Percent Solids 56 % 2. VOC 2 g/L 3. Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D 4541 550 psi, substrates fails 4. Hardness, ASTM D 3363 3H 5. Elongation,ASTM D 2370 9 6. Flexibility(1/4: Cylindrical mandrel), ASTM D 1737 Pass 7. Impact Resistance, MIL D-2794 >160 6. Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 4060, CS 17 wheel, 1,000 g Load 30 mg loss B. Broadcast Coat Dur-A-Glaze#4 1. Percent Solids 100 % 2. VOC 3.8 g/L 3. Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 11,200 psi 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 2,100 psi 5. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 5,100 psi 6. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 4060 C-10 Wheel, 1,000 gm load, 1,000 cycles 29 mg loss 7. Flame Spread/NFPA-101,ASTM E 84 Class A 8. Impact Resistance MIL D-24613 0.0007 inches, no cracking or delamination 9. Water Absorption. MIL D-24613 Nil 10. Potlife @ 70 F 20 minutes 1� C. Topcoat Armor Top 1. Percent Solids 95 _ 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Tensile Strength,ASTM D 2370 7,000 psi 4. Adhesion, ASTM 4541 Substrate Failure 5. Hardness, ASTM D 3363 4H 6. 600 Gloss ASTM D 523 70 7. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060 Gloss Satin CS 17 wheel (1,000 g load) 1,000 cycles 4 8 mg loss with grit 10 12 mg loss without grit DIVISION 9 -Page 9 of 15 DIVISION 9-FMSHES 8. Pot Life, 70 F, 50% RH 2 Hours 9. Full Chemical Resistance 7 days EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting flooring perfonnance. 1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for flooring installation and comply with requirements specified. PREPARATION A. General 1. New and existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, moss, algae growth, laitance, friable matter, dirt, and bituminous products. 2. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. a. Perform relative humidity test using is situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement. b. If the relative humidity exceeds 75% then Dur-A-Flex, Inc Dur-A- Glaze MVP Primer moisture mitigation system must be installed prior to resinous flooring installation. Slab-on grade substrates without a vapor barrier may also require the moisture mitigation system. 3. There shall be no visible moisture present on the surface at the time of application of the system. Compressed oil-free air and/or a light passing of a propane torch may be used to dry the substrate. I 4. Mechanical surface preparation a. Shot blast all surfaces to receive flooring system with a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine (Blastrac or equal). All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a minimum profile of CSP 3-4 as described by the International Concrete Repair Institute. b. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast machines shall be DIVISION 9 - Page 10 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using diamond grinders, needle guns, bush hammers, or other suitable equipment. C. Where the perimeter of the substrate to be coated is not adjacent to a wall or curb, a minimum 1/8 inch key cut shall be made to properly seat the system, providing a smooth transition between areas. The detail cut shall also apply to drain perimeters and expansion joint edges. d. Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 1/8 inch wide are to be chiseled or chipped-out and repaired per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. At spalled or worn areas, mechanically remove loose or delaminated concrete to a sound concrete and patch per manufactures recommendations. APPLICATION A. General Y 1. The system shall be applied in four distinct steps as listed below: a. Substrate preparation b. Priming C. Base coat application. d. Topcoat application 2. Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil-free compressed air. 3. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or other leveling work has been specified by the Architect. 5. A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator. B. Primer 1. The primer shall be Dur-A-Glaze #4 WB that is mixed at the ratio of 1 part resin to 4 parts hardener per the manufacturer's instructions. 2. The primer shall be applied by 1/8 inch notched squeegee and back rolled at DIVISION 9 -Page 11 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES the rate of 200-250 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 4 mils. C. Base Coat 1. The base coat shall be comprised of two components, a resin, and hardener as supplied by the Manufacturer. 2. The resin shall be added to the hardener and thoroughly mixed by suitably approved mechanical means. 3. The base coat shall be applied over horizontal surfaces using "v" notched squeegee and back rolled at the rate of 150-200 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 8-12 mils. D. Topcoat 1. The topcoat of Armor Top shall be roller applied at the rate of 500 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 3 mils. 2. The topcoat shall be comprised of a liquid resin, hardener and optional grit (for — abrasion resistance) and/or grip (For slip resistance) that is mixed per the manufacturer's instructions. 3. The finish floor will have a nominal thickness of 15-19 mils. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests, Inspection 1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator: a. Temperature 1. Air, substrate temperatures and, if applicable, dew point. b. Coverage Rates 1. Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of material used against the area covered. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process. B. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections. END OF SECTION 09672—RESINOUS FLOORING DIVISION 9 - Page 12 of 15 DIVISION 9 -FINISHES SECTION 09912—INTERIOR PAINTING SCOPE Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete all interior painting including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Walls and ceiling 2. ' Millwork,windows and doors as required APPROVED PAINT MANUFACTURERS 1. Benjamin Moore&Company 2. The Glidden Company 3. Sherwin-Williams Company 4. Or approved equal PAINT MATERIALS A. All finish paint colors used shall be as selected by the Owner and or Engineer/Architect. B. Contractor to supply and install the following: 1. Benjamin Moore Eco Sped Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 2. Benjamin Moore Eco Sped Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel EXTRA MATERIALS A. Amount: Upon completion of the work of this section, deliver to the Owner an extra 2 r' gallons of each color, type, and gloss of paint used on the work. B. Packaging: Tightly seal each container and clearly label with the contents and location used. DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to the job site in original containers and packages bearing the manufacturer's name, type and brand. Paints shall be delivered ready-mixed except as otherwise approved. B. Store materials and equipment used on the job in a single designated space. Keep storage area neat and clean and floors adequately protected from paint spillage. Place cloths and cotton waste which might constitute a fire hazard in metal containers; remove at the end of each work day. DIVISION 9 -Page 13 of 15 DIVISION 9-FINISHES PREPARATION A. General - Surfaces to receive paint shall be clean, dry and free of all matter which will affect adhesion of paint or appearance of finished surfaces. B. Fixtures: Remove lighting fixtures, canopies, switch plates, receptacle plates and the like before painting adjacent surfaces;replace after painting. Protect flush type fixtures. C. Protection of Adjoining Surfaces: 1. Prior to application of paint, remove fixture frames, escutcheons, cover plates and other similar objects on walls and store in protected area until ready to be replaced. 2. Use tarps, drop cloths, masking tape and other suitable covers as required to protect adjacent and underlying surfaces which are likely to be stained, spotted or otherwise marred. PAINT APPLICATIONS A. All surfaces to be painted must be primed. B. All joints of dissimilar materials (i.e. base trim to gyp. wall) are to be caulked with painters caulk after the primer is dry and before the first finish coat of paint. C. The contractor is to follow the manufacturer's instructions when applying primer and paint. D. The contractor is to sand and clean all painted surfaces between each coat. E. Material for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the product of the same manufacturer furnishing the first or primer- sealer coat for that particular surface except where metal primer is used applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. F. Exercise care so that paint does not splatter. When splattering does occur, remove promptly. G. Primer and intermediate coats of paint shall be unscarred and completely integral at the time of application of each succeeding coat. Each coat of paint shall be inspected and approved before the succeeding coat is put on. Tint each coat of paint a slightly different shade for identification of the different coats. H. The number of coats hereinafter specified is in addition to any shop primer coats. DIVISION 9 -Page 14 of 15 DIVISION 9 -FINISHES PAINTING SCHEDULE 1. Primed Ferrous Metals door frames and doors not factory finished. (Other than -y Galvanized Steel) a. Two coats Alkyd flat or alkyd enamel (as selected) 2. Finished gypsum board walls and ceilings a. One coat Latex Primer b. Two coats Latex Enamel (as selected) CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding and containers from the site; leave storage areas in acceptable condition. B. Replace fixture frames, escutcheons, cover plates and other similar items which were removed during painting. Paint stops and stains shall be completely removed without damage to surface. ENI) OF SECTION 09912—INTERIOR PAINTING IJ DIVISION 9 - Page 15 of 15 IDIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -I)IVI�ION NO. 10- SPECIALTIES Included in this Division are the following sections: 10150 Toilet Partitions 10400 Signs 10500 Lockers 10520 Fire Extinguishers 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 10 -Page 1 of 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10150-TOILET PARTITIONS SCOPE This section includes baked enamel toilet partitions, hardware and structural accessories. SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Showing layout of toilet partitions. B. Product data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts of typical panel, pilaster, door, hardware and fastening. C. Color chips: Manufacturer's complete range of 18 standard colors for baked enamel. The Owner shall determine color prior to ordering. D. Finishes: Baked enamel. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Components of toilet partitions shall be sourced from one single source manufacturer who certifies that materials meet or exceed specifications. B. Installation: Installer shall have a history of completed jobs of similar size and scope, and shall be qualified. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDILING Pre-finished materials shall be delivered to the job site in original, unopened cartons or other packaging materials necessary to protect finishes. Materials shall be stored in manufacturer's packaging until installation. Partitions shall be stored in horizontal position with adequate support to ensure flatness and to prevent damage to pre-finished surfaces. PROJECT CONDITIONS Building shall be enclosed and provide complete protection from outside weather. Temperature within building shall be above a minimum of 60°F. WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall provide a 15-year warranty against rusting of panels from the inside. B. Manufacturer shall provide a 5-year warranty for all chrome hardware, and a lifetime warranty for stainless steel hardware. DIVISION 10 - Page 2 of 10 DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES MANUFACTURER The baked enamel partitions shall be products manufactured by The Mills Company, subsidiary of Bradley Corp., Menomonee Falls, WI, www.bradleycorp.com or approved equal. EQiJIPMENT SentinelTM Floor Mounted Overhead Braced Series 400 toilet partition system or approved equal. COMPONENTS A. PermasealTM edges shall be formed as a two-piece unit to interlock together to provide a watertight fit. Corners are to be brazed and finished smooth. PermasealTM components shall not utilize crown molding. 1. PermasealTM Panels: 1" thick panels shall be manufactured from 22-gauge galvannealed steel, spaced and insulated with a moisture-resistant honeycomb core, adhered to the inner surfaces and set under pressure to cure. 2. PermasealTM Doors: 1" thick doors shall be manufactured from 22-gauge galvannealed steel, spaced and insulated with a moisture-resistant honeycomb core, adhered to the inner surfaces and set under pressure to cure. 16 and 14- gauge welded reinforcements shall be provided at top and bottom hinges. Concealed molybdenum cam to be factory installed. Door top to be drilled to receive top hinge pin providing three-point anchor. Slide latch holes to be pre- punched to permit field installation of concealed ADA compliant slide latch. 3. PermasealTM Pilasters: 1-1/4" thick pilasters shall be manufactured from 20- gauge galvannealed steel, spaced and insulated with a moisture-resistant honeycomb core, adhered to the inner surfaces and set under pressure to cure. The floor edge of the pilaster shall be provided with an internally welded 18- gauge reinforcement that will accept a 3/8" zinc-plated jack bolt for leveling. The bracket shall connect to two "U' brackets that are secured to the floor and will allow for a full range of adjustment. 4. Urinal screens shall have the same construction as doors, panels and pilasters. Urinal screens shall be 42" high and mounted at 18" above the finished floor. !� B. Headrail of etched and anodized aluminum shall be extruded with "anti-grip" profile clamps over pilasters and shall be secured to the wall with stainless steel brackets. C. 3" high one-piece shoe of type 304 stainless steel shall be secured by concealed retainer clips. D. Hardware: Mills heavy-duty chromed Zamac hardware and fasteners DIVISION 10 - Page 3 of 10 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES necessary to complete an installation shall be provided. 1. Hinges shall wraparound and be thru-bolted to the pilasters and shall have true gravity cams concealed within the door. The closing position of each hinge shall be fully adjustable. 2. Concealed slide latch shall provide emergency egress, shall not require any twisting motion and shall be ADA compliant. 3. Strike and keeper to be provided as surface mounted. 4. Coat hook and wall bumper shall be provided for in-swing doors. Door pulls shall be added for out-swing doors. 5. Stirrup-type, single-ear, double-ear and U-brackets shall be provided at appropriate locations. 6. Fastener for hinges, slide latch and keeper shall be zinc-plated with theft-resistant heads. 7. Fastener for brackets shall be zinc-plated with torx-heads. FINISHES Baked enamel partitions shall be cleaned and finished with automatically applied electrostatic high-grade synthetic enamel and oven-baked to provide a mar-resistant finish. INSPECTION Before installation, the installer shall inspect the site to ensure that no defects or conditions exist which would result in an unsatisfactory installation of the partitions. Measurements should also be taken at this time to further ensure correct installation. INSTALLATION A. Install partitions, screens, dressing compartments and enclosures in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's current installation instructions. Leave partitions complete, clean and free from defects in workmanship. B. Doors and hardware shall be thoroughly adjusted and left in proper working condition. Set doors in open or closed position as required. C. Outswing doors of more than 105° must have a wall or panel to stop door travel. (Note: Failure to follow manufacturer's recommended installation procedures voids warranty.) DIVISION 10 -Page 4 of 10' I DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES CLEANING All rubbish and cartons generated by installer shall be removed and area left broom clean. ENI) OF SEC'T'ION 10150-TOILET PARTITIONS DIVISION 10 -Page 5 of 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SEC'T'ION 10440—SIGNS GENERAL ' A. All signs shall be in conformance with Building Code of New York State, Chapter 11 Accessibility Code for Building Construction(Section 1110). B. All rooms or spaces shall have at least one identifying sign. C. Signs shall be SPJ (0.125 Matte Finished Acrylic)unframed acrylic plaque, face only, no backplate as manufactured by ASI Sign Systems Inc., 555 West 25th Street, New York, NY 10001, or approved equal. D. Provide (1) sign at each room listed: bathrooms, offices, break room, utility / mechanical, locker room,parts,tire storage. E. Height of letters shall be 2". Style shall be helvetica bold. F. Mounting height shall be as shown on the Drawings or determined by the Engineer in the field. G. All signage required by the Fire Marshal shall be included at no additional cost. ENI) OF SECTION 10440—SIGNS DIVISION 10 -Page 6 of 10 DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES J ' SECTION 10500 -LOCKERS GENERAL Lockers shall be Superior AQUAMAX HDPE'Sol'id Plastic Wardrobe and Box Lockers as manufactured by List Manufacturing oi'appfoved.equal. HDPE (high-density polyethylene) shall be of uniform color and texture. Fabricate lockers square, rigid and without warp. Lockers constructed'of other materials, including materials with a core and 'not of solid plastic, will not be acceptable. Locker units will ship factory pre-assembled. COLOR Door and accessory color to.be selected from manufacturer's standard list of colors. Body components shall be white in color for production lockers. DOORS' ~ Shall be fabricated of 1/2" thick HDPE. Doors shall,be the full width of the locker and shall be frameless, allowing access to the entire width of the, locker. Framed doors are unacceptable. Plain doors with perimeter ventilation shall provide ventilation properties superior to that of traditional framed doors. BODY Sides, tops, bottoms, back, and' shelves shall be made from high impact, high density, polyethylene (HDPE) 3/8" thick and'shall be white in color. Body incorporates mortise and tenon construction and shall be mechanically fastened together with stainless steel fasteners. Multiple width units will share intermediate sides and have unit width fop, bottom, back and shelf/tier divider.' LATCH ASSEMBLY The latching mechanism for wardrobe doors 20" high and higher shall be lift control type. Latching is achieved using an activation bar and multiple slide bars made of the same of similar materials as the locker body and doors and an additional 11 gauge type 304 stainless 'steel hasp mounted to the locker body that protrudes through door and aligns with lift handle. Box lockers 1.8"high and under include a single-point thru-'the-door finger pull with 11 gauge type 304 stainless steel padlock hasp. All doors are prepared for use with a.padlock. DIVISION110 -Page 7 of 10 DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES WARDROBE DOOR HANDLE Shall be made of injection molded HDPE or similar material and shall have an antimicrobial efficacy rating of 4.0 or greater. Handle shall move up and down in a vertical movement and shall require less than 5 lbs. of lifting force to operate in accordance with ADA requirements. HINGES Shall be heavy-duty continuous full height extruded aluminum with a powder coating to match the locker door color. Hinge knuckles shall be separated with two nylon washers. Hinges shall be fasted to door and body with theft proof stainless steel fasteners. ACCESSORIES Slope lop, end panels, fillers and 6 "base shall be manufactured of the same color, thickness and HDPE material as the locker doors. EQUIPMENT Furnish each locker with the following items, unless otherwise noted: A. Single tier locker openings 60" and 72" high shall include one hat shelf and two single prong hooks fabricated of 11 gauge type 304 stainless steel attached to locker body with theft proof stainless steel hardware B. Double tier locker openings 30" and 36 high and Z-tier locker openings shall include two single prong hooks fabricated of 11 gauge type 304 stainless steel attached to locker body with theft proof stainless steel hardware C. Locker openings 24"high and under shall not include hooks D. All lockers shall include an engraved aluminum number plate fastened to the door with theft proof fasteners 20-YEAR WARRANTY Superior AQUAMAX Plastic Lockers are covered against all defects in' materials and workmanship excluding damage resulting from deliberate destruction and vandalism under this section for a period of 20 years. ENI) OF SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS DIVISION 10 -Page 8 of 10 DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES SECTION 10520—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SCOPE A. The work under this heading shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and appliances necessary or required to perform and complete the installation of 1. Fire Extinguishers (6 required). SUBMITTALS Complete and accurate details and illustrated literature shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No installation shall be made without the prior approval of the Engineer. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Dry chemical fire extinguishers of five pound capacity shall be furnished capable of extinguishing Class A, B, C fires and installed complete with hanger fitting. Note: Type and location are to be subject to the approval of the Fire Marshal's Office. E. All fire extinguishers shall be of manufacture approved by the Fire Marshal. F. All fire extinguishers shall be fully charged and left ready for operation.. FIRE EXTINGUISHER MOUNTING Fire extinguishers shall be wall mounted with the top not more than 5 FT above the floor. The extinguishers shall be located in accessible and visible locations within the means of egress. END OF SEC'T'ION 10520—FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 10 -Page 9 of 10 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10800 -TOILET ACCESSORIES SCOPE A. Toilet accessories specified herein have been,selected from the current catalog of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Products of equal quality, design and function, will be approved. B. Installation of all equipment shall be done in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's printed directions utilizing the proper anchorage and attachments to the various wall finishes as designated by the manufacturer. C. Location of the various accessories not indicated on the Drawings shall be placed at the _ direction of the Engineers in the field. D. The Owner shall be supplied with (3) copies of all keys required.to access the toilet accessories. E. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the electric hand dryer units in the , toilets. SOAP DISPENSER Soap dispenser shall be as manufactured by Bradley or,approved equal. Style shall be model No. 6562-13, stainless steel,tank type, surface mounted,ADA compliant,with lather soap valve. TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS Toilet tissue dispensers shall be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal. Style shall be model No. 5402 stainless steel, surface mounted and dual roll dispenser. GRAB BARS Grab bars shall be as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal. Style shall be model No. 812 stainless steel, 1-1/2"O.D., and length as required by drawings and Code. MIRRORS Mirrors shall be vandal-resistant 1/4" glass with stainless steel frame and concealed fasteners. Locate and size mirror as per Interior Elevation Drawings. END OF SECTION 10800-TOILET AND UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES DIVISION 10 -Page 10 of 10 DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS, OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS-DIVISION NO. 13—SPECIAL, CONSTRUCTION Included in this Division are the following sections: 13121 Pre-Engineered Timber Column Structure 13411 Aboveground Storage Tank 13850 Leak Detection&Alarm System 13851 Fire Alarm System DIVISION 13 -Page 1 of 19 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13121 —PRE-ENGINEERED TIMBER COLUMN STRUCTURE PANT 1 GENERAL, 1.01 SECTION INCLUJDES A. Pre-Engineered factory and field fabricated Timber Column Structure B. Prefinished metal roofing and wall panels C. Prefinished metal trim items D. Prefinished soffits E. Pre finished gutters and downspouts 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS 1.04. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 2010 New York State Building Code B. ASCE - 7 C. Preservative Treated Lumber 1. American Wood Protection Association(AWPA) a. Commodity Specification C2 (2001), Preservative Treatment By Pressure Processes b. Use Category System U1, User Specification for Treated Wood C. UC4A (Important Structural—Ground Contact) d. UC413 (Structural Support—Ground Contact) e. Items treated under AWPA standards shall bear the quality mark of an independent testing agency or service ; 2. International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) a. Items treated under ICC-ES reports shall meet or exceed the applicable standard and shall bear the quality mark of an independent testing agency or service 3. Federal Specification TT-W-571-J. ,D. Framing Lumber 1. Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species a. National Design Specification for Wood Construction, current edition b. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer's Association, Inc. (NELMA) C. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(SPIB) d. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau(WCLIB) e. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) E. Wood Trusses 1. All lumber used in the design of wood trusses shall be kiln dried to maximum 19% moisture content and graded in accordance with the current grading rules. Design stresses allowed are those listed in the current editions of the respective Lumber Association's grading rules. DIVISION 13 -Page 2 of 19 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 2. The design of wood members shall be in accordance with the formulas published in the 2001 edition of the National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 3. Light metal toothed connector plates and joint design shall conform to specifications as set forth in the 2002 edition of Truss Plate Institute's Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses (TPI-2002). a. Connector plates shall be fabricated in accordance with applicable ICC-ES standards. 4. Truss members and joints shall be designed in accordance with TPI-2002. All truss designs shall be accompanied by complete and accurate shop drawings and contain the following information:' a. Slope or depth, span and spacing of the truss b. Heel bearing height C. Design loading to include: 1. Top chord live load 2. Top chord dead load 3. Bottom chord dead load 4. Concentrated loads and their points d. Adjustments to lumber and plate design values for conditions of use e. Plate type, thickness of gauge and size f. Lumber size, species and grade for each member 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. 80'-0" Clear span, roof pitch 3 on 12 B. Column spacing as per pre-engineered building manufacturer C. Primary framing 1. Columns 2. Trusses 3. Wind bracing D. Secondary framing 1. Perimeter baseboards and preservative treatment 2. Wall girts 3. Purlins 4. Overhang rafters and fascia 5. Ancillary blocking or furring as required E. Roof Covering 1. Prefinished ribbed metal panels 2. Other roof coverings as required F. Wall Covering 1. Prefinished ribbed metal panels &trim ` - 2. Other wall coverings as required G. Insulation and Liner package 1. Prefinished ribbed metal panels DIVISION 13 -Page 3 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 1.06 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The structural elements of the Pre-Engineered Timber Column Structure shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with the requirements of the 2010 NYS Building Code and ASCE -7 A. Roof Design Loads 1. Top Chord Live Load: 25 PSF 2. Top Chord Dead Load: 15 PSF 3. Bottom Chord Dead Load: 10 PSF 4. Bottom Chord Point Loads: 1,000 # (truss engineer to verify equipment loading) 5. Unbalanced Snow Loads: as per code B. Wind Speed 1. 120 MPH (V3s). Exposure `B" C. Roof and wall system shall be able to withstand the imposed loads with maximum allowable deflection of L/360. D. Assembly shall permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects. E. Size and fabrication of wall and roof systems to be free of distortion or defects that would be detrimental to appearance or performance. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Provide four(4) sets of the following bearing the seal of a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of New York. 1. Complete and detailed shop and erection drawings showing size and location of each part and component, certifying that the building design meets specified roof and wind loading requirements 2. Truss engineering analysis and design data, including the following: a. Axial forces and bending moments for each member b. Basic plate design value C. Design analysis of each joint showing that proper plates have been applied 3. Manufacturer's standard color chart 1.08 PROTECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit four(4) sets of final as-built drawings 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate members in accordance with standard industry practice 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor shall have a minimum of twenty years documented experience in the manufacture and erection of this type of structure. B. Design structural components under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of New York. DIVISION 13 -Page 4 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION C. Employ adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the , necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper and safe performance of the work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for all materials, whether furnished by himself or a subcontractor and propenstorage of the same. 1.11 REGULAI'ORY,REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall be,responsible for compliance with•2010 NYS Building Code and ASCE - 7 and all local ordinances covering the work. B. Contractor shall cooperate with regulatory' agencies or authorities to provide data as requested. PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING a , A. A pre-construction meeting will convene on site no later than one week prior to commencing work. 1,13 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field measurements shall be taken to verify that'components match shop drawings. 1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store prefabricated components (trusses, columns, steel panels and other items) so that they will not be damaged or deformed. B. Stack materials on platforms, pallets or other structures covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weather-tight ventilated-covering. Handle and store structural parts in a manner that will avoid deforming members or subjecting part's to excessive stresses. _ C. Store roofing and siding panels to allow water to drain,freely. ` D. Panels shall not be stored in contact with other materials that may cause staining or discoloration. 1.15 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate all,work with other trades on site. B. Fit carpentry work to other work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fitting. C. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking and supports to allow for attachment of other work. a 1.16 CERTIFICATIONS A. The following certifications shall be submitted: 1. Certification of the sheet steel supplier stating: a. Minimum thickness of metallic coating steel in decimal inch - b. Identification of all metallic coatings C. Coating weight range 1 DIVISION 13.-Page 5 of 19 DIVISION 13- SPECIAL, CONSTRUCTION d. Verification that material supplied is in conformance with applicable ASTM standard as stated in the technical specification 2. Certification of paint supplier stating: a. Generic chemistry of exterior side topcoat b. Percentage of poly-vinylidene difluoride(PVDF) in resin 3. Certification of sheet steel coater stating: a. Nominal paint film thickness in mils (one mil equals one thousandth of an inch) 4. Certification of treated lumber stating: a. Preservative type b. Preservative retention in the wood (pounds per cubic foot of wood) C. Depth of assay zone d. Compliance of preservative and its retention in wood with AWPA or ICC-ES standards 5. Certification of structural loading and column point reactions a. Show all wind loading requirements and bracing b. Show all column locations and loading reactions 6. Warranty a. Sample copy of warranty to be issued at completion of project b. Verification that warranty meets or exceeds the requirements stated in the technical specification 1.17 WARRANTY A. The building manufacturer shall supply a warranty to the Owner which shall provide that the manufacturer will: 1. For a period of fifty(50) years: a. Absorb repair or replacement costs, including materials and labor, if any preservative treated lumber fails due to decay or insect attack b. Repair, or at its discretion, replace free of charge the building framework, including roofing and/or siding panels, if directly damaged by snow loads. 2. For a period of thirty-five (35)years: a. Repaint any roofing or siding panel on which,under conditions of normal weather,the paint has separated from the panels due to flaking or peeling. b. Repaint any roofing or siding panels on which, under conditions of normal weathering, chalking greater than a rating of 8 (ASTM D4212 Method `A') or color change greater than five (5)units (ASTM D2244)has occurred. 3. For a period of ten(10) years: a. Repaint any roofing or siding panel on which, under conditions of normal weather, exhibit corrosion resulting in red rust greater than 1/2 inch from any sheared edge which is clearly visible in casual observation. 4. For a period of five (5) years: a. Repair, or at its discretion, replace free of charge the building framework, including roofing and/or siding panels, if directly damaged by wind loads, unless damage is caused by flying or falling objects. b. Repair any roof leaks due to defects in materials or workmanship. DIVISION 13 - Page 6 of 19 DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 5. For a period of one (1) year: a. Repair other building parts that prove' to be defective in materials or workmanship. 6. The manufacturer shall not be liable for damage due to deterioration caused by interior chemical vapors and/or dust, deterioration from proximity to salt water body or aggressive exterior atmosphere, damage by flying or falling objects, or collateral damage to interior walls, ceiling, partitions, equipment and/or, contents, or cost' of preparation of the site PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS—BUILDING SYSTEM A. MORTON BUILDINGS, INC., Morton, Illinois 1-800-447-7436(local area 631-734-4060) B. Other manufacturers offering similar systems I. Fetterville Sales, East Earl PA'1-800-3'31-1875 2. As approved by project architect. 2002 MATERIALS—FRAMING A. Columns (Columns on Concrete Foundation or Alternate Foundation) See also 2.04 1. Factory fabricated from minimum 3-ply No. 1 SYP 2. Provide factory or field installed blocking on outside face of column between nailers. B.. Wood Trusses 1. Lumber a. Top Chord: Southern Yellow Pine of size and grade to meet design requirements b. Bottom Chord: Southern Yellow Pine of size and grade to meet design requirements' C. Webs:' Southern Yellow Pine of size and grade to,meet design requirements 2. Trusses shall be constructed of surfaced lumber(S4S) and compliant with SPIB visual and structural grade requirements 3. Plates: Connector plates shall meet design requirements and shall be compliant with applicable ICC-ES standards and specifications 4. Design and fabricate trusses and connections to withstand snow, wind and all dead loads. 5. Fabricate trusses in plant, using mechanical or hydraulic fixtures as required to bring members into contact. Install plates in accordance with�manufacturer's instructions. C." Baseboards I. 2"x 8"No. 1 Southern Yellow Pine with 1/2"x 7/16"notch 2. l Pressure treated with wood preservative to a retention in compliance with applicable AWPA or ICC-ES standards and specifications and'kiln dried'after treatment to 19% maximum moisture content' ,3. Preservative shall penetrate 100% of sapwood. DIVISION 13 - Page 7 of 19 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION � D. Wall girts 1. First nailer(girt) above baseboard: 2"x 6"No. 2 or better Spruce-Pine-Fir(SPF) with 1/2"x 3/4"notch in bottom. 2. Balance of nailers: 2"x 4"2100 MSR (minimum) SPF. d 3. Overhang top nailer: 2"x 6"No. 2 or better SPF. E. Base reinforcement 1. 7/16"x 32" OSB panels installed between the baseboard and first nailer and located in notches. F. Purlins and truss ties 1. 2"x 4"No. 2 or better SPF G. Overhang framing 1. Provide factory fabricated rafter frames. 2. Provide 2"x 6"No. 2 or better SPF factory beveled fascia boards. H. Wind bracing 1. 2"x 6"No. 2 or better SPF from endwall column to first truss back. I. Framing around openings 1. 2" x 4"No. 2 or better SPF around personnel doors. 2. 2"x 6"No. 2 or better SPF around overhead door openings J. Headers 1. Provide built-up headers as required for proper installation. K. Incidental Framing 1. 2"x 4" and/or 2"x 6"No. 2 or better SPF_ L. Interior framing 1. 2"x 4"No. 2 or better SPF 2.03 MATERIALS —PREFINISHED METALS & SIDING A. Roofing panels (Fluoroflex 20000) 1. Panel substrate shall be 0.019"minimum thickness commercial steel sheet with an )AZ55 Aluminum/Zinc(Galvalume) coating(ASTM A792). 2. The weather side of the panel shall receive a thick polyurethane primer and a nominal, one mil topcoat of 70%polyvinylidene difluoride(PVDF)resin. 3. Color selection of roofing panels shall be from the manufacturer's standard color chart. f 4. The non-weather side paint system shall consist of a two coat finish with a total nominal thickness of one-half mil. B. Wall Panels (Hi-Rib) ; 1. Panel substrate shall be 0.019"minimum thickness commercial steel sheet with an AZ55 Aluminum/Zinc(Galvalume) coating(ASTM A792). 2. The weather side of the panel shall receive a thick polyurethane primer and a nominal one mil topcoat of 70%polyvinylidene difluoride (PVDF) resin. ; 3. Color selection of roofing panels shall be from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 4. The non-weather side paint system shall consist of a two coat finish with a total nominal thickness of one-half mil. DIVISION 13 - Page'8 of 19 i DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION C. Soffit Panels (FluoroflexTM 1000) 1. Panel substrate shall be 0.019"minimum thickness commercial steel sheet with G90 (zinc) coating per ASTM A653 or AZ55 (aluminum/zinc) coating per ASTM A792. 2. The weather side of the panel,shall receive a nominal two tenths mil polyurethane primer and a nominal eight tenths mil topcoat of 70%polyvinylidene difluoride (PVDF) resin to achieve a total nominal paint film thickness of one mil. 3. Color selection of siding panels shall be from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 4. The non-weather side paint system shall consist of a two coat finish with a total nominal thickness of one-half mil. D. Metal Trim Items (FluoroflexTM 1000) 1. Die-formed steel from the same quality material as the siding panels 2.04 MATERIALS—DOORS & WINDOWS A. Provide doors and frames in accordance with specification Division 8. B. Provide windows in accordance with specification Division 8 2.05 MATERIALS—OTHER A. Corner bracing 1. Provide 1-1/4"wide high tensile steel strapping in all unobstructed corners in an"X" configuration. B. Roofing and siding fasteners 1. EPDM washered,painted, center drive stainless steel screws for ribbed steel panels, or 2. EPDM washered, galvanized ring-shank nails for'ribbed steel panels C. Closure strips 1. Closed cell foam. D. Sealant 1. 100% neutral curing silicone sealant, and 2. Paintable sealant where required E. Column sockets (If built on concrete foundation) 1. Fabricate socket from minimum 4 gauge hot rolled steel 2. Factory paint socket to inhibit corrosion F. Socket fasteners 1. 1/2" diameter x 10"galvanized "J"bolts cast 8"into concrete foundation 2. 1/2" diameter machine bolts to secure column to socket 3. Ancillary washer and nuts ` PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions prior to design of building. DIVISION 13 -Page 9 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION li 3,02 ERECTION—FRAMING—GENERAL A. Erect framing in accordance with manufacturer's established construction procedures. J B. Make all components and building plumb, square, straight and true to lines, according to industry standards (See 3.08). C. Provide adequate temporary bracing to assure structure remains plumb and square until permanent bracing is installed. D. Altering of structural members will not be permitted. 3.03 ERECTION—FRAMING A. Column (built on foundation) 1. Attach steel column socket to the concrete foundation with 1/2"x 10"plated"Y bolts, or appropriate adhesive anchors and washers and nuts 2. Attach the column to the socket with(4) 1/2"bolts and (8) 20d galv. R.S. nails B. Upper Column 1. Set upper column to positive interlock with lower column. 2. Install manufacturer's recommend quantity and size pneumatically driven fasteners. C. Baseboards (built on foundation) 1. Install 2"x 8"treated plank, at grade,using builder's recommended fasteners. D. Wall girts 1. Install 2"x 6"notched nailer to receive OSB panel. 2. Install 2"x 4"nailers with on-center spacing as shown on building plans. 3. Install 2"x 6" overhang nailer at the top. E. Trusses 1. Set trusses in plane with the center member of the upper column using lifting methods as approved by the manufacturer. 2. When properly positioned, install two %" diameter machine bolts and manufacturer- recommended 20d ring shank nails through two of the upper column laminates and the truss heel. 3. Brace trusses as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Purlins 1. Install 2"x 4"purlins at 24" on-center(maximum) and attached to trusses with 60d ring shank nails. G. Wind bracing 1. Install 2",x 6" angled bracing at locations recommended by the manufacturer. H. Incidental framing 1. Install 2"x 4"or 2"x 6"blocking as required according to building manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 ERECTION—PREFINISHED MMATEALS —GENERAL A. Roofing Panels 1. Install panels perpendicular to supports, aligned straight with end fascia 2. Fasten panels to purlins with screw fasteners. DIVISION 13 -Page 10 of 19 i DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION B. Siding and wainscot panels 1. Install panels perpendicular to supports, aligned level and plumb to industry standards (See 3.08). 2. Fasten panels to wall girts with screw fasteners. C. Trim items 1. Install trim items at the base, wainscot transition, corners, top of steel siding, fascia, gables and ridge using appropriate fasteners. D. Vent-A-Ridge 1. Install over ridge trim using screw fasteners. 2. Insure that a minimum of 2" clear throat opening is maintained. E. Soffits 1. Install soffits to interlock with trim items at top of steel siding and at fascia. 2. Use solid soffit at end overhang. ,- 3. Use a combination of solid and perforated soffits to provide balanced ventilation at side overhangs. F. Gutter and downspouts 1. Install gutters with spikes and ferrules (with washers) spaced 24"on-center. 2. Silicone sealant and silicone rubber gaskets shall be used at laps to maintain leak prevention and to relieve stress due to thermal movement. G. Filler strips 1. Provide closed cell foam filler strips at the top and bottom of the roofing panels. H. Gutter and downspouts 3.08 TOLERANCES _J A. Framing Members 1. 1/4" from level. 2. 1/8" from plumb B. Siding and roofing ' 1. 1/8" from true position END SECTION 13121 —PRE-ENGINEERED TIMBER COLUMN STRUCTURE DIVISION 13 -Page 11 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 11 SECTION 13410-ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK SCOPE The Contractor is to furnish tank and equipment necessary to install, test and make ready for operation; aboveground, steel wall, SCDHS Approved storage tank as specified herein and manufactured by Lube Cube, Containment Solutions, or approved equal. The Contractor will be responsible for all coordination with the SCDHS for inspection, approval and registration of the newly installed#2 fuel oil tank. GOVERNING STANDARDS All work shall conform to the requirements of the following: Suffolk County Department of Health Services Article 12 Tank Program. © NFPA-30 AND 30A Standard for flammable and combustible liquids. ® UL-142 Standard for aboveground tanks for flammable liquids. GENERAL TANK DESCRIP'T'ION 1. LubeCube Aboveground Storage Tanks (1-800-537-4730), or approved equal, for Flammable and Combustible Liquids are designed, constructed, and listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL 142. UL 142 is the standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids. The listing shall meet requirements for atmospheric tanks of The National Fire Protection Association Sections 30, 30A, 31 and The Uniform Fire Code Article 79. 2. LubeCube tanks are designed and UL listed as atmospheric tanks with a maximum working pressure of 1 PSI. 3. The primary tank and the secondary containment tank shall have passed a proof of design hydrostatic pressure test of 25 PSI. 4. The tank shall be equipped with a minimum two (2) lifting lugs. 5. The tank Manufacturer shall provide proof (upon request) of a minimum 10 years of manufacturing UL 142 listed rectangular tanks. 6. Tanks shall include a 1 year limited warranty. 7. Tank shall be provided with threaded PVC plugs in fittings (water tight). 1 8. Tank shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) support feet. DIVISION 13 - Page 12 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PRIMARY STORAGE TANK(INTERNAL TANIQ 1. The standard primary storage tank shall be rectangular in design. The tank will be constructed of UL 142 specified steel thickness, with continuous welds. 2. The primary storage tank shall be constructed of ASTM A-569 or A-36 carbon steel, as required for compatibility of product being stored. 3. The primary tank shall be pressure tested in the factory to UL 142 specifications (3 PSI). 4. The tank shall be fitted with: a 2" fill port, a 2" normal vent, either a 4", 6" 8" or 10" emergency vent port, a 2" liquid gauging port, two (2) 2" spare ports, as per the Construction Documents. SECONDARY CONTAINMENT TAINTS(EXTERNAL TANK) 1. The secondary containment tank shall be rectangular in design and constructed of UL 142 specified steel thickness, with continuous welds. 2. The secondary containment tank shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as secondary containment under UL 142 standard. 3. The secondary containment tank shall provide a minimum of 110% secondary containment. 4. The secondary containment tank shall be equipped with a 2 inch monitoring port and a 4"5 65', 8", or 10" emergency vent port as required by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc, and Construction Documents. 5. The secondary containment tank shall be pressure tested in the factory to UL 142 specification (3 PSI). COATINGS 1. The exterior surface of the secondary tank shall be cleansed of foreign material and coated with a corrosion resistant industrial paint(3 to 5 mils dry film thickness). 2. The standard color shall be epoxy coated white. DIVISION 13 - Page 13 of 19 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 11 LABELS Tanks shall be labeled in 4"high block letters on all sides as directed by the County. " INSTALLATION The tank shall be installed at the location shown on the Contract Drawings. The installation procedure should strictly follow manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall famish to the Owner a statement that the installation was performed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. WARRANTY The tank shall bear a UL certification plate and manufacturer's 3 year warranty shall be turned over to the Owner after the systems acceptance. INSURANCE The tank manufacturer shall provide a certificate of insurance that provides a minimum of twenty (20)million dollars ($20,000,000) of product liability coverage per occurrence. END OF SECTION 13410—ABOVEGROUND STORAGE TANK SECTION 13850—LEAK DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM i SUBMITTALS DIVISION 13 - Page 14 of 19 i DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL, CONSTRUCTION B. Shop drawings and product data for configuration of alarm system and each component, with physical dimensions and proposed mounting locations of components and conduit runs. C. Elementary wiring diagrams and manufacturer's literature for alarm panels, cables, probes and fittings. D. Written proposal for any modifications must be approved by the Engineer in writing prior to installation. E. "As-Built" drawings include components and mounting locations. F. Operation & maintenance manuals, including installation instructions, system setup instructions and system operating instructions. PRODUCTS I,EVEI,MONITORING4 OVERFILL AND LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM The system shall be packaged continuously monitoring, ultrasonic gauging, overfill and leak detection alarm system. The system shall be an audio/visual alarm controller with touchscreen display Series OEL 8000111 K4P as manufactured by Omntec (631-981-2001) or approved equal, with leak detection capabilities. The system shall also be capable of interfacing with a web page making current inventory, sensor status and alarms available from any web browser or smart phone. Alarm Controller A. Provide and install one common remote tank gauging and leak detection system for all tanks that can simultaneously monitor product levels, water levels, temperatures, and leaks in up to eight tanks. System shall be UL listed and provide intrinsically safe outputs for use in Class 1, Group C & D Hazardous Locations when wired in accordance with manufacturers control drawing. System shall also be Third Party Certified and listed to meet EPA leak detection requirements. Locate monitor console where shown on project drawings. B. Central Processing and Indicating Instrument — Controller shall have a backlit 7 inch color touchscreen display and 32 character thermal printer. System must be capable of driving single or multi-tank 12 VDC NEMA 4 X remote audio visual high level alarms and/or remote displays. System must be capable of providing up to three individually programmed isolated relay contacts for any alarm event. Controller shall be as manufactured by OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. Model No. OEL8000IIIKP. The main console will be preprogrammed by the factory and field adjusted as required. Console shall be equipped with (1) RS-232 port, Ethernet, and e-mail capability for communication. Modbus, additional relays, and 4-20mA output shall be available as options. System shall also be capable of serving up a web page making current inventory, sensor status and alarms available from any web browser or smart phone. DIVISION 13 - Page 15 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 11 C. Panel shall come equipped with three LED lights for Ok, Warning, and Alarm status. Alarms shall be displayed visually on a 7" color touch screen with wide viewing angle as well as Warning and Alarm lights on face of panel. System shall have an 85dB 0 piezoelectric horn for audible alarm indication. D. Panel shall be compact in size not to exceed 15.21" (w) 7.73" (h) 5.53 (d) and constructed of powder coated industrial steel for indoor mounting. The complete leak / level gauging system shall include a one year parts warranty. The complete leak / level monitoring system shall be as manufactured by OMNTEC Mfg. Inc. Ronkonkoma, NY (631-981- 2001) or equal. LIQUID LEVEL PROBE i A. Shall consist of a 316 grade stainless steel IP68 rated rigid model MTG level probes or model MTG-F Kynar flexible level probes where overhead clearance is not available. Probe shall use magnetostrictive technology and simultaneously provide product levels, water levels, and temperature within the storage tanks. i B. The level probe shall be installed in an accessible 4" NPT male riser pipe. Probe shall include 4" cord griped cap, floats, and installation kit. All splices must use supplied epoxy kits. Field wiring from probe to controller must be Belden 8761 cable in suitable conduit. Level probes shall be as manufactured by OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. LIQUID LEVEL PROBE 1. All leak sensors shall be microprocessor based and capable of recognizing its unique serial number, part number, and function. All sensors (up to 22) shall be capable of being installed on(1) four conductor cable back to the main controller. The sensors principle of operation shall be electro optic for liquid detection and conductivity to discriminate fuel and water. Sensors shall be remotely testable from console via green tactile test button. Sensors shall be capable of detecting liquid at any angle. Float technology will not be accepted. Interstitial sensors shall be model#BX-PDWS for steel tank interstitials and BX-PDS for containment sumps. See project drawings for location and quantities of sensors required. All sensors are to be wired thru conduits using 22 gauge four conductors, shielded cable with drain wire. Do not run intrinsically safe low voltage wiring in the same conduit with any other wiring. All sensors shall be as manufactured by Omntec Mfg. OVERFILL STATION i 1. Provide near each tank fill terminal as shown on project drawings a low voltage audio/visual NEMA 4X overfill alarm and silencing station. Remote annunciator light shall flash when the liquid level in the tank rises above a pre-programmed caution point. As level then rises above the preprogrammed high/high level point the flashing light will stay on continuously and the horn will pulse. The horn will remain on until the silence button is pressed. Remote audible shall have the ability to be programmed to time out. Visual light will remain lit until the level DIVISION 13 - Page 16 of 19 DIVISION 13-SPECIAL. CONSTRUCTION in the tank drops below the high/ high level point. Remote annunciator shall be RAS -series for single or multi-tanks and shall be manufactured by OMNTEC Mfg., Inc. EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. All parts and components of the alarm system must be clean and free of dirt and water prior - to installation. B. Mount the overfill alarm panel on the building interior and remote panels in the exterior locations shown utilizing stainless steel hardware. Panels shall be accessible to the Owner for periodic testing of the system and reading of the indication lights during an alarm situation. C. All power and sensor wiring shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and Division 16 of the specifications. Provide all control and power wiring in rigid conduit. D. Installation shall be neat and workmanlike. E. Install all system components in accordance with the manufacturer installation instructions. Provide all equipment, connections and incidentals as required for a complete system installation. F. Demonstrate operation of system components to Owner. END OF SECTION 13850 -LEAD DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 13 -Page 17 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 11 SECTION 13851—FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 11 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and description of operation: 1. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time. 2. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software required. i 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: NICET Level III or IV (3 or 4) certified fire alarm technician or registered fire protection engineer, employed by fire alarm control panel manufacturer, Contractor, or installer, with experience designing fire alarm systems in the jurisdictional area of the authorities having jurisdiction. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 3 years documented experience installing fire alarm systems of the specified type and providing contract maintenance service as a regular part of their business. PART 2 PRODUCT'S 2.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. Fire Alarm System: Provide a new automatic fire detection and alarm system: 1. Provide all components necessary, regardless of whether shown in the contract documents or not. 2. Protected Premises: Entire building shown on drawings. 3. Evacuation Alarm: Single smoke zone; general evacuation of entire premises. 4. Master Control Unit(Panel): New, located at supervising station. B. Supervising Stations and Fire Department Connections: 1. Public Fire Department Notification: By on-premises supervising station. 2. On-Premises Supervising Station: New proprietary station operated by Owner, located at Office. ' 3. Means of Transmission to On-Premises Supervising Station: Directly connected noncoded system. C. Power Sources: 1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of the facility power distribution system. 2. Secondary: Storage batteries. 3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate entire system for period specified by NFPA 72. DIVISION 13 - Page 18 of 19 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 4. Each Computer System: Provide uninterruptible power supply(UPS). 2.02 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finish areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted unit are acceptable. 2. Provide legible, permanent labels for each control device, using identification used in operation and maintenance data. B. Fire Alarm Control Units, Initiating Devices, and Notification Appliances: Analog, addressable type; listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Circuit Conductors: Copper or optical fiber; provide 200 feet extra; color code and label. D. Surge Protection: In accordance with IEEE C62.41.2 category B combination waveform and NFPA 70; except for optical fiber conductors. E. Locks and Keys: Deliver keys to Owner. F. Instruction Charts: Printed instruction chart for operators, showing steps to be taken when a signal is received (normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble); easily readable from normal operator's station. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70, and the contract documents. B. Conceal all wiring, conduit, boxes, and supports where installed in finished areas. C. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices,before installation. D. Install instruction cards and labels. 3.02 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION A. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test. B. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with contract documents. 3.03 CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner. END OF SECTION 13851 —FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 13 -Page 19 of 19 DMSION 15—MECE ANICAL GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, ADDENDA, and other Contract Documents. Refer,to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items, which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS-DIVISION 15—PLUMBING/HVAC 15082 Piping Insulation 15083 HVAC Piping Insulation 15086 Duct Insulation 15145 Plumbing Insulation 15146 Plumbing Specialties 15186 Refrigerant Piping& Specialties 15191 Fuel Oil Piping System 15212 Compressed Air System 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15544 Fuel Fired Unit Heaters 15732 Variable Refrigerant Volume(VRC)HVAC System 15810 Ducts 15820 Duct Accessories 15835 Power Ventilators 15850 Air Outlets &Inlets DIVISION 15 - Page 1 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15082—PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1/ 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal Characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1! PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K'value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn,bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches. C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation. 2.03 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. I. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: a. Compatible with insulation. DIVISION 15 -Page 2 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves,unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self- sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,but bevel and seal ends of insulation. E. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment. F. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings,joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. G. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insertlocation: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; maybe factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. H. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves,pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports,protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07840. END OF SECTION 15082—PIPING INSULATION DIVISION 15 - Page 3 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 41 SECTION 15083 —HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 ' SUBMITTALS 1® A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal Characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. PART-2 PRODUCTS 1� 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,NFPA 255, or UL 723. 11 2.02 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 1/ 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. 1� ENI) OF SECTION 15083—HVAC PIPING INSULATION 4! 11 11 DIVISION 15 -Page 4 of 34 It DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15086—DUCT INSULATION PANT 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84,NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K'value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. END OF SECTION 15086—DUCT INSULATION DIVISION 15 -Page 5 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 11 SECTION 15145—PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 11 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 11 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping,pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and 41 fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight. 11 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 11 A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. 11 B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. It 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B 16.22 wrought copper and 11 bronze. 2.05 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L(B), Drawn(H). i! 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and DIVISION 15 - Page 6 of 34 1: DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3,malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. _ 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.09 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping-Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 5. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. DIVISION 15 - Page 7 of 34 DMSION 15—MECHANICAL 11 B. Plumbing Piping- Water: 1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. /' 2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 4. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 5. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 40 6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.10 GATE VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: IP 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body,bronze trim, rising stem,handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. B. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body,bronze trim, outside screw and yoke,handwheel, solid O wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze body, 11 304 stainless steel ball,regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union. 2.12 PLUG VALVES 11 A. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and plug,pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide lever operator with set screw. 2.13 SWING CHECK VALVES 1� A. Up to 2 Inches: 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125,bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends. 2.14 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, iron body,bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer 1� style ends. 2.15 RELIEF VALVES A. Temperature and Pressure Relief: ID 1. AGA Z21.22 certified,bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, DIVISION 15 -Page 8 of 34 1: DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL capacity ASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled. 2.16 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719. G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. END SECTION 15145—PLUMBING INSULATION c' DIVISION 15 - Page 9 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 11 SECTION 15146—PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 11 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 1� B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 11 A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.02 CLEANOUTS It A. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. 11 2.03 HOSE BIBBS A. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc,hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with AS SE 1011. 2.04 HYDRANTS It A. Wall Hydrants: 2.05 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Double Check Valve Assemblies: 1� 1. AS SE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent. 1a DIVISION 15 - Page 10 of 34 1` DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL PANT 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. B. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. C. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines,janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. END OF SECTION 15146—PLUMBING SPECIALTIES t DIVISION 15 -Page 11,of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SEC'T'ION 15186-REFRIGERANT PIPING& SPECIAL'T'IES PART 1 GENERAL 11 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical 11 dimensions, and sizes. C. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 11 2.01 PIPING A. Copper Tube: ASTM B280, H58 hard drawn 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.22 wrought copper. 11 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. B. Pipe Supports and Anchors: 1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 11 a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 11 5. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 7. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. 8. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded 1! connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.02 VALVES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1! 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc, solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F. B. Service Valves: 1 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs,brass caps,removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi. DIVISION 15 -Page 12 of 34 1� DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5. END OF SECTION 15186-REFRIGERANT PIPING& SPECIALTIES DIVISION 15 - Page 13 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15191—FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEM PARI' I GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tanks, system layout, pipe sizes, location, and elevations. For fuel oil tanks, indicate dimensions and accessories including manholes and hold down t straps. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve. PAIN 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the material, fabrication, and operating requirements of ASME B31.3, except as modified herein. 1� B. Carbon Steel Pipe: 1. Comply with One of the Following: 2. End Connections: a. Threaded type complying with ASME B16.3, Class 150 or ASME B16.11. 10 2.02 FLANGES AND PIPING COMPONENTS A. Flanges: 1. Provide flanged end connections on equipment, fittings, piping,piping components, adapters, couplings, and valves complying with ASME 16.5, 1/ Class 150. - 2. Carbon Steel: Comply with ASTM A105/A105M. 3. Gaskets, Non-Isolating: a. Comply with ASME B16.12, raised-faced type. 4. Gaskets, Electrically Isolating: ®i a. Comply with ASTM D229. 5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: a. Comply with ASME B 18.2.1 and ASME B 18.2.2. b. Bolts: 1) Threaded in accordance with ASME B1.1, Class 2A fit, Coarse Thread Series,for sizes 1 inch and smaller and Eight-Pitch Thread Series for sizes larger than 1 inch. C. Nuts: 1) Threaded in accordance with ASME B1.1, Class 2B fit, Coarse Thread 6 Series for sizes 1 inch and smaller and Eight-Pitch Thread Series for sizes larger than 1 inch. DIVISION 15 - Page 14 of 34 r DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL B. Piping Components: 1. Provide components that meet the material, fabrication, and operating requirements of ASME B31.3, except as modified herein. 2. Pressure Design Class: Class 150 as defined in ASME B16.5. 3. Steel Couplings: Comply with API Spec 5L, seamless, extra heavy, wrought steel with recessed ends. 4. Threaded Unions: a. Comply with ASME B 16.3 9, Class 150. b. Materials: Comply with ASTM A312/A312M, Grade 304 or 316. C. Dielectric Unions: Comply with dimensional, strength, and pressure requirements of ASME B16.39, Class 150. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2.04 GATE VALVES A. MSS SP-80, Class 125,bronze body,bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 2.05 GLOBE VALVES A. MSS SP-80, Class 125,bronze body, bronze trim,handwheel,bronze disc, solder ends. 2.06 BALL VALVES A. MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP,bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder. 2.07 SWING CHECK VALVES A. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc, solder ends. 2.08 RELIEF VALVES A. Bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated at maximum 60 psi, UL listed for fuel oil, capacities ASME certified and labelled. 2.09 STRAINERS A. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. DIVISION 15 -Page 15 of 34 4 DIVISION 15—1MECHANICAL 2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve, suitable for minimum 200 psi CWP and 250 degrees F. 2.11 ABOVEGROUND FUEL STORAGE TANKS A. Tank: UL 80, welded steel, oval with steel support saddles, tappings for accessories, threaded connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AP 1 RP 1615. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. Install to NACE SP0286. C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints, or connected equipment. D. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. 3.02 FUEL TANK INSTALLATION A. Install tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ENI) OF SECTION 15191—FUEL OIL PIPING SYSTEM DIVISION 15 -Page 16 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SEC'T'ION 15212—COMPRESSED AIR SYS'T'EM PART1 GENERAL ® 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature with capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate piping system schematic with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. PART 2 PRODUC'T'S 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. B. .Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K(A), drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade Sn95. 2.02 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder or threaded ends. B. Ball Valves: 1. MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends with union. C. Swing Check Valves: 1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or threaded ends. 2.03 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. B. Flexible Connector: Neoprene with brass threaded connectors. 2.04 COMPRESSOR A. All components in the Compressor room to be supplied by the Town. DIVISION 15 -Page 17 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL Adk 9W PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install compressor unit on concrete housekeeping pad. Refer to Section 03300. B. Install line size gate valve and check valve on compressor discharge. C. Connect condensate drains to nearest floor drain. D. Install valved bypass around air dryer. Factory insulate inlet and outlet connections. E. Install valved drip connections at low points of piping system. F. Install takeoffs to outlets from top of main, with shut off valve after take off. Slope take off piping to outlets. G. Install compressed air couplings, female quick connectors, and pressure gages where outlets are indicated. H. Install tees instead of elbows at changes in direction of piping. Fit open end of each tee with plug. END OF SECTION 15212—COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM DIVISION 15 - Page 18 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL I SECTION 15410—PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. B. Water Efficiency:, EPA WaterSense label is required for all water closets, urinals, lavatory faucets, and showerheads. 2.02 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSET A. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.2; floor mounted, siphon jet, vitreous china, 16.5 inches high, close-coupled closet combination with elongated rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever flushing valve,bolt caps, vandalproof cover locking device. I. Water Consumption: Maximum 1.28 gallon per flush. B. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front,brass bolts, without cover. r C. Handle Height: 44 inches or less. 2.03 WALL HUNG URINALS A. Urinals: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, wall hung with side shields and concealed carrier. I. Flush Volume: 1.0 gallon, maximum. 2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud). 3. Flush Operation: Manual metering valve. 4. Trap: Integral. 5. Supply Size: 3/4 inch. 6. Outlet Size: 2 inches. B. Flush Valves: ASME Al 12.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and accessories. 1. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop. 2. Metering Type: Easily accessible adjustment nut. C. Carriers: I. ASME Al 12.6.IM; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger,bearing studs. DIVISION 15 - Page 19 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 2.04 LAVATORIES A. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME Al 12.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, 20-3/4 by 20-3/4 inch minimum, with 4 inch high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and soap depression. 1. Drilling Centers: 4 inch. B. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator with maximum flow of 0.5 gallon per minute (low- flow), indexed handles. 2.05 SINKS A. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.3; 25 by 25 by 25 inch outside dimensions 18 gage,18 inch thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge back drilled for trim. 1. Drain: 1-1/2 inch chromed brass drain. 2.06 SHOWERS A. Cabinet: ASME Al 12.19AM; porcelain enamelled steel, 32 by 32 by 75 inches with stone texture receptor, soap dish, removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece, white color. B. Trim: ASME Al 12.18.1; concealed shower supply with indexed handles,bent shower arm with adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 2.5 gallons per minute flow, and escutcheon. C. Shower Head: 2.07 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS A. Water Cooler: Electric, mechanically refrigerated; surface handicapped mounted; stainless steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator,push button, mounting bracket; integral air cooled condenser and stainless steel grille. 1. Capacity: 8 gallons per minute of 50 degrees F water with inlet at 80 degrees F and room temperature of 90 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 18. 2. Electrical: 115 V, 60 Hertz compressor, 6 foot cord and plug for connection to electric wiring system including grounding connector. 2.08 SERVICE SINKS A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.1; 22 by 18 by 12 inch deep, porcelain enamelled (inside only) cast iron roll-rim sink, with 12 inch high back, concealed hanger, chrome plated strainer, stainless steel rim guard, cast iron P-trap with adjustable floor flange. B. Trim: ASME Al 12.18.1 exposed wall type supply with cross handles, spout wall brace, vacuum breaker, hose end spout, strainers, eccentric adjustable inlets, integral screwdriver stops with covering caps and adjustable threaded wall flanges. C. Accessories: DIVISION 15 -Page 20 of 34 .Al DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 1. Hose clamp hanger. 2. Mop hanger. 2.09 EMERGENCY EYE WASH A. Emergency Wash: ANSI 2358.1; wall-mounted, self-cleaning, non-clogging eye wash with quick opening, full-flow valves, stainless steel eye wash receptor, twin eye wash heads , stainless steel dust cover, copper alloy control valve and fittings. PAIN 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. E. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. END OF SECTION 15410—PLUMBING FIXTURES DIVISION 15 -Page 21 of 34 1 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15544—FUEL FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and locations and sizes of field connections. 1.02 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for heat exchangers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS FIRED UNIT BEATERS A. Unit Heaters: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled,pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger,burner, controls, and accessories: I. Heating: Natural gas fired. 2. Discharge Louvers: Individually adjustable horizontal and vertical louvers to match cabinet finish. 3. Downturn Nozzle: 30 degree nozzle to match outlet and cabinet finish. B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors, glass fiber insulation and reflective liner. C. Supply Fan: Propeller type with direct drive . D. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel welded construction. E. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply, F. Performance: 1. Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less than requirements of ASHRAE Std 90.1; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE Std 103. 2. Refer to Furnace Schedule. Gas heating capacities are sea level ratings. 2.02 OIL FIRED UNIT BEATERS A. Unit Heaters: Self-contained,packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger,burner, controls, and accessories: 1. Discharge Louvers: Individually adjustable horizontal louvers to match cabinet finish. 2. Downturn Nozzle: 30 degree nozzle to match outlet and cabinet finish. DIVISION 15 - Page 22 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors, glass fiber insulation and reflective liner. C. Supply Fan: Centrifugal forward curved type with belt drive . D. Combustion Chamber: UL 727; welded stainless steel. E. Oil Burner: High pressure atomizing type, rubber mounted, adjustable combustion air blower, integrated fuel pump, hinged flame inspection port, cadmium sulfide flame sensor, electrodes, ignition transformer, oil nozzle. F. Performance: 1. Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP)not less than requirements of ASHRAE Std 90.1; seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE Std 1'03. 2. Refer to Furnace Schedule. Waste oil heating capacities are sea level ratings. PAIN 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A. B. Install gas fired units in accordance with NFPA 54 and,applicable codes. C. Install oil fired units in accordance with NFPA 31 and applicable codes. D. Provide vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211. END OF SECTION 15544—FUEL FIREID'UNIT HEATERS i DIVISION 15 -Page 23 of 34 L ' DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15732-VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME CZEC)MVAC SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Pre-Bid Submittals: For proposed substitute systems/products, as defined in PART 2, and alternate systems/products, as defined above, proposer shall submit all data described in this article, under the terms given for substitutions stated in PART 2. ; B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data sheets showing the following for each item of equipment, marked to correlate to equipment item markings shown in the contract documents: C. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings custom-made for this project; include as-designed HVAC layouts, locations of equipment items,refrigerant piping sizes and locations, condensate piping sizes and locations, remote sensing devices, control components, electrical connections, control wiring connections. Include: 1. Detailed piping diagrams, with branch balancing devices. 2. Condensate piping routing, size, and pump connections. 3. Detailed power wiring diagrams. 4. Detailed control wiring diagrams. PANT 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN A. System Operation: Heating or cooling, selected at system level. 1. Provide a complete functional system that achieves the specified performance based on the specified design conditions and that is designed and constructed according to the equipment manufacturer's requirements. 2. Conditioned spaces are shown on the drawings. _ y� 3. Outdoor/Condenser unit locations are shown on the drawings. 4. Indoor/Evaporator unit locations are shown on the drawings. 5. Required equipment unit capacities are shown on the drawings. 6. Refrigerant piping sizes are shown on the drawings. 7. Connect equipment to condensate piping; condensate piping is shown on the drawings. B. Cooling Mode Interior Performance: 1. Daytime Setpoint: 72 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F. 2. Setpoint Range: 57 degrees F to 77 degrees F. 3. Night Setback: 78 degrees F. 4. Interior Relative Humidity: 20 percent,maximum. C. Heating Mode Interior Performance: 1. Daytime Setpoint: 68 degrees F, plus or minus 2 degrees F. 2. Setpoint Range: 59 degrees F to 80 degrees F. 3. Night Setback: 60 degrees F. DIVISION 15 -Page 24 of 34 r DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 4. Interior Relative Humidity: 10 percent, minimum. D. Outside Air Design Conditions: 1. Summer Outside Air Design Temperature: 0.4 percent cooling design condition listed in ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook. 2. Winter Outside Air Design Temperature: 99.6 percent heating design condition listed in ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook. E. Energy Design Wind Speed: 25 mph. F. Refrigerant Piping Lengths: Provide equipment capable of serving system with following piping lengths without any oil traps: 1. Total Combined Liquid Line Length: 160 feet, minimum. G. Controls: Provide the following control interfaces: 1. For Each Indoor/Evaporator Unit: One wall-mounted wired "local" controller, with temperature sensor; locate where indicated. H. Local Controllers: Wall-mounted, wired, containing temperature sensor. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. All Units: Factory assembled, wired, and piped and factory tested for function and safety. 1. Refrigerant: R-41 OA. 2. Performance Certification: AHRI Certified; www.ahrinet.org. 3. Safety Certification: Tested to UL 1995 by UL or Intertek-ETL and bearing the certification label. 4. Provide outdoor/condensing units capable of serving indoor unit capacity up to 200 percent of the capacity of the outdoor/condensing unit. 5. Provide units capable of serving the zones,indicated. 6. Energy Efficiency: Report EER and COP based on tests conducted at"full load"in accordance with AHRI 210/240 or alternate test method approved by U.S. Department of Energy. -„ B. Electrical Characteristics: 1. Power- Condensing Units: 208 to 230 Volts, 1-phase, 60 Hz. 2. Power- Indoor Units: 208 to 230 Volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 3. 208-230 Voltage Range: 187 to 253 volts. 4. Control: 16 volts DC. 2.03 OUTDOOR/CONDENSING UNITS A. Outdoor/Condensing Units: Air-cooled DX refrigeration units, designed specifically for use with indoor/evaporator units; factory assembled and wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls; modular design for ganging multiple units. 1. Refrigeration Circuit: Scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator. 2. Refrigerant: Factory charged. 3. Variable Volume Control: Modulate compressor capacity automatically to DIVISION 15 -Page 25 of 34 r � DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL maintain constant suction and condensing pressures while varying refrigerant volume to suit heating/cooling loads. 4. Capable of heating operation at low end of operating range as specified, without additional low ambient controls or auxiliary heat source; during heating operation, reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return or defrost is not permitted, due to potential reduction in space temperature. 2.04 INDOOR/EVAPORATOR UNITS A. All Indoor/Evaporator Units: Factory assembled and tested DX fan-coil units, with electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, factory wiring and piping, self-diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch. 1. Refrigerant: Refrigerant circuits factory-charged with dehydrated air, for field charging. 2. Temperature Control Mechanism: Return air thermistor and computerized Proportional-Integral-Derivative(PID) control of superheat. B. Concealed-In-Ceiling Units: Ducted horizontal discharge and return; galvanized steel cabinet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform wiring in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electric Code(NEC). D. Coordinate with installers of systems and equipment connecting to this system. END OF SECTION 15732 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME (VRC) HVAC SYSTEM DIVISION 15 - Page 26 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECF1ANICAL SECTION 15810—DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings,particulars such as gages, sizes,welds, and configuration prior to start of work for low pressure class and higher systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A. Low Pressure Supply(System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. B. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. 2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) and as indicated. B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook -Fundamentals. C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, J provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). H. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct,painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. A& DIVISION 15 - Page 27 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. END OF SECTION 15510—DUCTS DIVISION 15 - Page 28 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15520—DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS -METAL A. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS -FABRIC 2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 2.06 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x DIVISION 15 -Page 29 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. 1. Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum. B. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers,provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings. D. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA(DCS). Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. Elan) OF SECTION 15820—DUCT ACCESSORIES DIVISION 15 - Page 30 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL SECTION 15835—POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted,power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. PART 2 PRODUC'T'S 2.01 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL A. Static and Dynamically Balanced: AMCA 204 -Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. B. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. D. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. E. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. F. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.02 WALL EXHAUSTERS A. Per schedules on drawings. B. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with spun aluminum housing; resiliently mounted ' motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.062 inch thick aluminum wire bird screen. C. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings,blades linked, and line voltage motor drive,power open, spring return. D. Sheaves: For V-belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. 2.03 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Per schedules on draiwngs. B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge. C. Grille: Molded white plastic. D. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced,bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set DIVISION 15 - Page 31 of 34 DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL at mid-position; fan shaft with self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 4 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide sheaves required for final air balance. C. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters. D. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated. END OF SECTION 15835—POWER VENTILATORS DIVISION 15 - Page 32 of 34 DIVISION fly—MECHANICAL SECTION 15850—AIR OUTLETS & INLETS PARS' 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Provide square, stamped,multi-core diffuser to discharge air in four way pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Provide inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. 2.02 CEILING EGG CRATE EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Egg crate style face consisting of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch grid core. B. Fabrication: Grid core consists of aluminum with mill aluminum finish. C. Frame: Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings. 2.03 LOUVERS A. Type: 4 inch deep with blades on 45 degree slope with center baffle and return bend, heavy channel frame, 1/2 inch square mesh screen over exhaust and 1/2 inch square mesh screen over intake. B. Fabrication: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat finish. C. Mounting: Furnish with exterior flat flange for ` installation. 2.04 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA(DCS) of minimum 18 gage, 0.0598 inch ' . galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch. DIVISION 15 - Page 33 of 34 l DIVISION 15—MECHANICAL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. B. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and register's, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. END OF SECTION 15850—AIR OUTLETS &INLETS DIVISION 15 -Page 34 of 34 I DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL GENERAL The work under this Division shall be subject to the requirements of the CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS, DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES,ADDENDA and other Contract Documents. Refer to the Drawings and Specifications of other trades and Contractors for items which might affect the work under this Division. TABLE OF CONTENTS -DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL, Included in this Division are the following sections: - 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16070 Hanger and Supports 16075 Electrical Identification 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16131 Conduit 16138 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16145 Lighting Control Devices 16412 Enclosed Switches 16423 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16443 Panel Boards 16491 Fuses 16510 Interior Luminaires 16520 Exterior Luminaires r t DIVISION 16 -Page 1 of 33 . DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16060—GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit,boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. D. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. 2. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point-to-point" methods. E. Grounding Electrode System: 1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. 2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. C. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. C: DIVISION 16 -Page 2 of 33 DMSION 16—ELECTRICAL 3. Metal Building or Structure Frame: a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location. 4. Ground Rod Electrode(s): a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode. F. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures,metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 16123: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. - 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). DIVISION 16 -Page 3 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. 3. Unless otherwise indicated,use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. D. Ground Rod Electrodes: 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel. 3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. END OF SECTION 16060—GROUNDING AND BONDING DIVISION 16 -Page 4 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16070—HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of 25%. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. C. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. i. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers,brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. DIVISION 16 -Page 5 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. PAIN 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. END OF SECTION 16070—HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .a DIVISION 16 -Page 6 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16075—ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01' QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PARI' 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage and phase. 2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. - ' b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed. B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 16123. i 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. DIVISION 16 -Page 7 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: } L. Materials: B. Identification Labels: 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. 2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: 2. ' Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. • ' Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3.- Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. END.OF SECTION 16075—ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION DIVISION 16 -Page 8 of 33 DMSION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16123—BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PAIN 1 PRODUCTS 1.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated,permitted, or required. 1.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors except where aluminum conductors are specifically indicated or permitted for substitution. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum. Conductors designated with the abbreviation "AL" indicate aluminum. a. Substitution of aluminum conductors for copper is permitted, when approved by Owner and authority having jurisdiction, only for the following: 1) Feeders: Copper conductors size 1/0 AWG and larger. b. Where aluminum conductors are substituted for copper, comply with the following: 1) Size aluminum conductors to provide, when compared to copper sizes indicated, equivalent or greater ampacity and equivalent or less voltage drop. 2) Increase size of raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. as required to accommodate aluminum conductors. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. i 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. 4. Aluminum Conductors (only where specifically indicated or permitted for substitution): AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors recognized by ASTM B800 and compact stranded in accordance with ASTM B801 unless otherwise indicated. H. Minimum Conductor Size: 12 AWG. DIVISION 16 -Page 9 of 33 DIVMSION 16—ELECTRICAL I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code: a. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. 1.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2 or USE-2, except as indicated below. 1.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2 or USE-2. E. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. 1.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A- 486B or UL 486C as applicable. DIVISION 16 -Page 10 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install aluminum conductors in accordance with NECA 104. D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. F. Terminate cables using suitable,fittings. G. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each, outlet., H. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Connections for Aluminum Conductors: Fill connectors with oxide inhibiting compound where not pre-filled by manufacturer. I. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. J. Install,firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and methods specified in Section 07840. K. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required-for a complete operating system. END OF SECTION 16123—BUILDING WIRE ANN CABLE I DIVISION 16-Page.11 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16131—CONDUIT PART[' 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the-most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, PVC-coated - galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. 3. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a• resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters oris characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience,use corrosion'protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). E. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. G. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. H. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as,suitable for the purpose intended. C. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. DIVISION 16 -Page 12 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT(RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed'and labeled as complying with UL,6. B. Fittings: 1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. j 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression(gland)type fittings are not permitted. 2.04. PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal,conduit with external polyvinylchloride(PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL6. B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil. C. PVC-Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride(PVC),minimum thickness of 40 mil. D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride(PVC), 'J minimum thickness of 15 mil. 2.05 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT,(FMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC,standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Fittings: 1. Description:, Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material:'Use steel or malleable iron. 2.06 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. B. Fittings: , 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2., Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings:'Use compression(gland) or set-screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors'and couplings. DIVISION.16 -Page 13 of 33 DIVISION,16—ELECTRICAL 2:07 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A.' Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. B. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.' 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based,minimum thickness of 20 mil. B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound- force. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. D. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)using only tools approved by the manufacturer. E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. F. Conduit Support: 1. Secure_ and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 16070 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. G. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and'neither can be rotated,use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 4. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. H. Penetrations: DIVISION 16.-Page 14 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 3. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 4. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 5. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 6. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and methods specified in Section 07840. I. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement,provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes,but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. J. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential,provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. 2. Where conduits pass-from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. END OF SECTION 16131—CONDUIT DIVISION 16 -Page 15 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 161.38—BOXES PANT 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled'as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and. Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounte&in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and-device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through-wall"boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. _ 8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying V with UL 514A. 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. _ 10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. DIVISION 16 -Page 16 of 33 • C DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. PART 3,EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B., Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Box Supports: - 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70,and'Section 16070 using suitable supports and methods approved by the-authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported-by threaded conduit connections in accordance,with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other,systems. E., Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. F. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. G. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using materials and methods specified in Section 07840. END OF SECTION 16138—BOXES DIVISION 16-Page 17 of 33 DIVISION 16 ' ELECTRICAL SECTION 16140—WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A: Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. C. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. D. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles installed in kitchens. E. Provide GFI protection for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying With NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard _ toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw,three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1 1. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. B. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. DIVISION 16 -Page 18 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2. Weather Resistant Convenience-Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, , listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation iri damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. C. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide.with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,rectangular,decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V,NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and,labeled as weather resistant type,complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where,applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in,those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights:,Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor. , ' , b. Receptacles: 18 inches above ,finished floor or 6 inches above counter. C. Install'wiring devices in accordance with,manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage,between adjacent devices exceeds 366 V. E. Connect wiring devices.by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4.turnaround screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by, the manufacturer. Where present, do not use,push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. F. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. END OF SECTION 16140—WIRING DEVICES , DIVISION 16 -Page 19 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL, SECTION 16145—LIGHTING CONTROL.DEVICES PART 1'GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Provide lighting plan indicating location, model number, and orientation of each occupancy sensor and associated system component. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors,hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a'complete operating system. 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage- areas, overageareas, for automatic control'of load indicated. 2. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes. 3. Compatibility(Non-Dimming Sensors): Suitable for controlling incandescent lighting, low-voltage lighting with electronic and magnetic transformers, fluorescent lighting with electronic and magnetic ballasts, and fractional motor loads, with no minimum load requirements. 4. Where wired sensors are indicated, wireless sensors are not acceptable without prior approval of Architect. B. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Occupancy"sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Operation: Operates only as vacancy sensor(manual on/ automatic off). . 2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: DIVISION 16 -Page 20 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet. C. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on the drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. 2. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. D. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. 4. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 2.03 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS A. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls: 1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and field-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A. 2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate. 3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide. 4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation. 5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn- on ratio with delayed turn-off. 6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 7. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. O PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with DIVISION 16 -Page 21 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL • bonding jumper. E. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device,provide wall plate in accordance with Section 16140. F. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. 2. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy • sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. G. Outdoor Photo Control Locations: 1. Where possible,-locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. • If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down. - _ ' 2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself. H. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control. ti END OF SECTION 16145—LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES AL DIVISION 16 -Page 22 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16412—ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; heavy duty, ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load. D. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. E. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Minimum Ratings: a. Switches Protected by Class H Fuses: 22,000 rms symmetrical amperes. F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. G. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a Aft suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. Provide NEMA I for indoor and NEMA 3R for outdoor installations. I. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes. J. Heavy Duty Switches: 1. Comply with NEMA KS 1. 2. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks. DIVISION 16 -Page 23 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL PARI' 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 16070. E. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply,mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16060. G. Provide fuses complying with Section 16491 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 16412—ENCLOSED SWITCHES i DIVISION 16 -Page 24 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16423—ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS \ PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Overload Relays: NEMA ICS 2; bimetal. D. Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, standard duty oiltight type. B. Selector Switches: Rotary type. C. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, as scheduled. Provide fused primary, secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.03 DISCONNECTS A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnects in common enclosure. Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070. END OF SECTION 16423—ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS DIVISION 16-Page 25 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16443—PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PANT 2 PRODUCT'S 2.01 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. C. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. E. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. s 1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 2. Fronts: 3. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. H. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. I. Load centers are not acceptable. r� DIVISION 16 -Page 26 of 33 C DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1,power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: 1. Provide bolt-on type. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum. 2. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type. E. Enclosures: O 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. 2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip- indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and _ complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. DIVISION 16 -Page 27 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship),NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 16070. E. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. F. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 16060. H. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. END OF SECTION 16443—PANELBOARDS 0 DIVISION 16 -Page 28 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16491—FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. 1W END OF SECTION 16491—FUSES Aft DIVISION 16 -Page 29 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16510—IN'T'ERIOR LUMINAIRES PART I GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: I. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions,photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit,boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. LED Luminaires: I. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. DIVISION 16 -Page 30 of 33 C DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL 2.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. B. Battery: 1. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated. 2.04 EXIT SIGNS A. All Exit Signs: Internally illuminated with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship),NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Recessed Luminaires: 1. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and combustible materials according to listing. F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Emergency Lighting Units: i I. Exit Signs: J J. Install lamps in each luminaire. END OF SECTION 16510—INTERIOR LUMINAIRES Aft D DIVISION 16 -Page 31 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL SECTION 16520—EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART I GENERAL, 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions,photometric performance, weight, effective projected area(EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features. 1. LED Luminaires: a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings. 2.02 LUMINAIRES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable. C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Unless otherwise indicated,provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses,housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light. E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware,poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc. G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated. H. LED Luminaires: 1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable. 2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80. 3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data. DIVISION 16 -Page 32 of 33 DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL I. Exposed Hardware: Stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section. B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general workmanship) and NECA/IESNA 501 (exterior lighting). D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires. E. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to center of luminaire. F. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. G. Install lamps in each luminaire END OF SECTION 16520—EX'T'ERIOR LUMINAIRES E AM DIVISION 16-Page 33 of 33